Перевод: со всех языков на английский

с английского на все языки

command+course

  • 81 управляемость

    7) Oil: steerability
    8) Astronautics: controlability
    9) Mechanics: handiness
    10) Business: steering
    12) Makarov: control, roadability (автомобиля), sensitivity
    13) Yachting: driving qualities

    Универсальный русско-английский словарь > управляемость

  • 82 Б-54

    НИ БЕЛЬМЕСА (НИ БУМ-БУМ) не знать, не понимать, не смыслить (в чём) highly coll these forms only obj (both variants) or predic with subj: human (2nd var.)) to know or understand nothing (about sth.): X (в Y-e) не понимает ни бельмеса (X в Y-e ни бум-бум) - X doesn't know beans (squat) about Y X doesn't know (understand) a thing (the first thing) about Y X doesn't have the foggiest (notion) about Y X doesn't have a clue about Y (of one's command of a foreign language, technical jargon etc) X doesn't know (understand) a word of Y (of a foreign language only) X can't say two words in (speak a word of) Y.
    «Играть не умеете! В миттельшпиле ни бум-бум...» (Аксёнов 3). "You don't know how to play! You don't know a thing about the midgame!" (3a).
    «Теперь (Херувимов) в направление тоже полез сам ни бельмеса не чувствует, ну а я, разумеется, поощряю» (Достоевский 3). "Now he's (Cherubimov has) jumped onto the progressive bandwagon too, hasn't got the foggiest, of course, but naturally I encourage him" (3a).
    (Марина Дмитриевна:) Ты что же, ничего не соображал? (Лукашин:) Ни бум-бум... (Брагинский и Рязанов 1). (M.D.:) Didn't you know what was going on? (L.:) I hadn't a clue... (1a).
    Анучкин:) Признаюсь, не зная французского языка, чрезвычайно трудно судить самому, знает ли женщина по-французски или нет. Как хозяйка дома, знает?.. (Кочкарёв:) Ни бельмеса (Гоголь 1). (A.:) I must admit that as I don't know French myself, it's awfully difficult for me to judge whether or not the young lady knows French. Do you think she does? (K.:) Not a word (1a).
    Однажды он стал читать Крымову стихи, потом прервал чтение, сказал: «Простите, вам, верно, не интересно». Крымов, усмехнувшись, ответил: «Скажу откровенно, не понял ни бельмеса» (Гроссман 2). Once he began reading some poems to Krymov, but then broke off and said: Tm sorry. You're probably not in the least interested." Krymov grinned. "To be quite honest, I couldn't understand a word of it" (2a).

    Большой русско-английский фразеологический словарь > Б-54

  • 83 ни бельмеса

    • НИ БЕЛЬМЕСА < НИ БУМ-БУМ> не знать, не понимать, не смыслить (в чём) highly coll
    [these forms only; obj (both variants) or predic with subj: human (2nd var.)]
    =====
    ⇒ to know or understand nothing (about sth.):
    - X (в Y-e) не понимает ни бельмеса (X в Y-e ни бум-бум) ≈ X doesn't know beans (squat) about Y;
    - [of one's command of a foreign language, technical jargon etc] X doesn't know (understand) a word of Y;
    - [of a foreign language only] X can't say two words in (speak a word of) Y.
         ♦ "Играть не умеете! В миттельшпиле ни бум-бум..." (Аксёнов 3). "You don't know how to play! You don't know a thing about the midgame!" (За).
         ♦ "Теперь [Херувимов] в направление тоже полез; сам ни бельмеса не чувствует, ну а я, разумеется, поощряю" (Достоевский 3). "Now he's [Cherubimov has] jumped onto the progressive bandwagon too; hasn't got the foggiest, of course, but naturally I encourage him" (3a).
         ♦ [Марина Дмитриевна:] Ты что же, ничего не соображал? [Лукашин:] Ни бум-бум... (Брагинский и Рязанов 1). [M.D.:] Didn't you know what was going on? [L.:] I hadn't a clue... (1a).
         ♦ [Анучкин:] Признаюсь, не зная французского языка, чрезвычайно трудно судить самому, знает ли женщина по-французски или нет. Как хозяйка дома, знает?.. [Кочкарёв:] Ни бельмеса (Гоголь 1). [A.:] I must admit that as I don't know French myself, it's awfully difficult for me to judge whether or not the young lady knows French. Do you think she does? [K.:] Not a word (1a).
         ♦ Однажды он стал читать Крымову стихи, потом прервал чтение, сказал: "Простите, вам, верно, не интересно". Крымов, усмехнувшись, ответил: "Скажу откровенно, не понял ни бельмеса" (Гроссман 2). Once he began reading some poems to Krymov, but then broke off and said: "I'm sorry. You're probably not in the least interested." Krymov grinned. "To be quite honest, I couldn't understand a word of it" (2a).

    Большой русско-английский фразеологический словарь > ни бельмеса

  • 84 ни бум-бум

    • НИ БЕЛЬМЕСА < НИ БУМ-БУМ> не знать, не понимать, не смыслить (в чём) highly coll
    [these forms only; obj (both variants) or predic with subj: human (2nd var.)]
    =====
    ⇒ to know or understand nothing (about sth.):
    - X (в Y-e) не понимает ни бельмеса (X в Y-e ни бум-бум) ≈ X doesn't know beans (squat) about Y;
    - [of one's command of a foreign language, technical jargon etc] X doesn't know (understand) a word of Y;
    - [of a foreign language only] X can't say two words in (speak a word of) Y.
         ♦ "Играть не умеете! В миттельшпиле ни бум-бум..." (Аксёнов 3). "You don't know how to play! You don't know a thing about the midgame!" (За).
         ♦ "Теперь [Херувимов] в направление тоже полез; сам ни бельмеса не чувствует, ну а я, разумеется, поощряю" (Достоевский 3). "Now he's [Cherubimov has] jumped onto the progressive bandwagon too; hasn't got the foggiest, of course, but naturally I encourage him" (3a).
         ♦ [Марина Дмитриевна:] Ты что же, ничего не соображал? [Лукашин:] Ни бум-бум... (Брагинский и Рязанов 1). [M.D.:] Didn't you know what was going on? [L.:] I hadn't a clue... (1a).
         ♦ [Анучкин:] Признаюсь, не зная французского языка, чрезвычайно трудно судить самому, знает ли женщина по-французски или нет. Как хозяйка дома, знает?.. [Кочкарёв:] Ни бельмеса( Гоголь 1). [A.:] I must admit that as I don't know French myself, it's awfully difficult for me to judge whether or not the young lady knows French. Do you think she does? [K.:] Not a word (1a).
         ♦ Однажды он стал читать Крымову стихи, потом прервал чтение, сказал: "Простите, вам, верно, не интересно". Крымов, усмехнувшись, ответил: "Скажу откровенно, не понял ни бельмеса" (Гроссман 2). Once he began reading some poems to Krymov, but then broke off and said: "I'm sorry. You're probably not in the least interested." Krymov grinned. "To be quite honest, I couldn't understand a word of it" (2a).

    Большой русско-английский фразеологический словарь > ни бум-бум

  • 85 под рукой

    I
    • ПОД РУКОЙ; ПОД РУКАМИ both coll
    [PrepP; these forms only; adv or subj-compl with copula (subj: usu. human or concr)]
    =====
    ⇒ (of or in refer, to things, often household items that are located in convenient places so that one can easily use them; of or in refer, to people who stay or are kept nearby s.o., ready to help him, carry out his orders etc) (a person or thing is) very close by, easily accessible:
    - (close < near>) at hand;
    - at one's (s.o.'s) side (elbow);
    - [of or in refer, to things only] handy;
    - at one's (s.o.'s) fingertips.
         ♦ Мужчине всегда в некоторой степени свойственно желание попетушиться, а тут ещё под рукой такая штучка, как револьвер, почему же не схватить его, если для этого нужно только открыть ночной столик? (Олеша 3). It's always, to a certain extent, the nature of a man to want to ride the high horse, and when a thing like a revolver is close at hand, why not grab it, especially if all one has to do is open the night table? (3a).
         ♦...По-видимому, распорядитель пира не считал, что веселью пришёл конец, и он, как опытный тамада, всегда имел под рукой верное средство для того, чтобы вдохнуть жизнь в замирающее застолье (Катаев 2)....The tamada evidently decided it was not yet time to end the party, and like the experienced master of ceremonies he was, he had at hand a sure means of breathing life into the expiring company (2a).
         ♦ Ежели у человека есть под руками говядина, то он, конечно, охотнее питается ею, нежели другими, менее питательными веществами... (Салтыков-Щедрин 1). If a man has beef on hand, then of course he lives on that more willingly than on other less nourishing substances... (1a).
         ♦ Он отдал распоряжение шофёру. Он приказал референту сообщить в Департамент, что господин прокурор занят... Никого не принимать, отключить телефон и вообще убираться к дьяволу с глаз долой, но так, впрочем, чтобы всё время оставаться под рукой (Стругацкие 2). He gave instructions to his chauffeur and ordered his assistant to inform the department that the prosecutor was occupied. "Don't admit anyone, disconnect the phone. Go to the devil, get out of my sight, but stay within easy reach" (2a).
         ♦ "Я поглотил кучу книг и приобрёл уйму знаний, чтобы быть полезным ей и оказаться под рукой, если бы ей потребовалась моя помощь" (Пастернак 1). "For her sake I devoured piles of books and absorbed a great mass of knowledge, to be available to her if she asked for my help" (1a).
         ♦ "Вы дилетант". Сейчас можно признаться, что тогда я не знал и этого слова. И не имея под рукой словаря иностранных слов, не посмел возражать (Войнович 5). "You're a dilettante." Now I can admit that at the time I had no idea what that word meant, and with no dictionary of foreign words handy, I did not dare object (5a).
    II
    [PrepP; these forms only; adv]
    =====
    ⇒ when worked on, refined, crafted etc by s.o.:
    - under the hand(s) of.
         ♦ Под рукой мастера кусок теста превращается в произведение кулинарного искусства. In the hands of a great chef a lump of dough turns into a work of culinary art.
    • ПОД РУКОЙ <-ю> чьей, (у) кого obsoles, coll
    [PrepP; these forms only; subj-compl with copula (subj: usu. human or collect)]
    =====
    ⇒ a person (or group) is under s.o.'s authority or direction, is totally subjugated to s.o.:
    - X под рукой у Y-a ≈ X is under Y's command (rule, control, thumb);
    - Y controls X.
    IV
    • ПОД РУКОЙ <-ю> obs
    [PrepP; these forms only; adv]
    =====
    ⇒ (to do or say sth.) concealing it from others, without the knowledge of others:
    - discreetly.
         ♦ Ему [помощнику градоначальника] предстояло одно из двух: или немедленно рапортовать о случившемся по начальству и между тем начать под рукой следствие, или же некоторое время молчать и выжидать, что будет (Салтыков-Щедрин 1). Не [the assistant town governor] had two choices: either to report the occurrence to the authorities at once, and secretly begin an investigation in the meantime; or else to keep quiet for a while and see what would happen (1a).
         ♦ "Собираются на обед, на вечер, как в должность, без веселья, холодно, чтоб похвастать поваром, салоном, и потом под рукой осмеять, подставить ногу один другому" (Гончаров 1). [context transl] "If they meet at a dinner or a party, it is just the same as at their office-coldly, without a spark of gaiety, to boast of their chef or their drawing-room, and then to jeer at each other in a discreet aside, to trip one another up" (1a).

    Большой русско-английский фразеологический словарь > под рукой

  • 86 लॄ _lॄ

    लॄ f. A mother, a divine female. -m. Śiva. -f. =
    लृ. cf. लॄर्महात्मा सुरो बालो भूपः स्तोमः कथानकः (वक्ता) । मूर्खो शिश्नो गुदः कक्षा केशः पापरतो नरः ॥ Enm. एकान्वयो मम Ś.7; मनस्येकं वचस्येकं कर्मण्येकं महात्मनाम् H.1.197.
    -4 Firm, unchanged; एको ग्रहस्तु Pt.1.26.
    -5 Single of its kind, unique, singular.
    -6 Chief, supreme, prominent, sole; ब्राह्मण्यास्तद्धरेत्पुत्र एकांशं वै पितुर्धनात् Mb.13.47.11. ˚पार्थिव, ˚धनुर्धरः, ˚ऐश्वर्य M.1.1 sole sovereignty; एको रागिषु राजते Bh.3.121.
    -7 Peerless, matchless.
    -8 One of two or many; Me.3. एकः सख्यास्तव सह मया वामपादाभिलाषी Me.8.
    -9 Oft. used like the English indefinite article 'a', or 'an'; ज्योतिरेकम् Ś.5.3.
    -1 True.
    -11 Little. Oft. used in the middle of comp. in the sense of 'only', with an adjectival or adverbial force; दोषैकदृक् looking only to faults; त्वदेकेषु Ku.3.15 your arrow only; so भोगैकबद्धस्पृहः. एकः-अन्यः, or अपरः the one- the other; अजामेकां लोहित... नमामः । अजो ह्येको... अजोन्यः Śvet. Up.4.5; it is used in the plural in the sense of some, its correlative being अन्ये or अपरे (others); एके समूहुर्बलरेणुसंहतिं शिरोभिराज्ञामपरे महीभृतः ॥ Śi.12.45; see अन्य, अपर also.
    -कः N. of Viṣṇu. the ऴSupreme Being or Prajāpati; एक इति च प्रजापतेरभिधानमिति । ŚB. on MS. 1.3.13.
    (-कम्) 1 The mind; एकं विनिन्ये स जुगोप सप्त सप्तैव तत्याज ररक्ष पञ्च Bu. Ch.2.41.
    -2 unity, a unit; Hch.
    -का N. of Durgā. [cf. Persian yak; L. aequus].
    -Comp. -अंशः a separate part, part in general. विष्टभ्याह- मिदं कृत्स्नमेकांशेन स्थितो जगत् Bg.1.42. एकांशश्च प्रधानतः Ms. 9.15.
    -अक्ष a.
    1 having only one axle. द्विचक्रमेकाक्षम् (रथम्) Bhāg.4.26.1.
    -2 having one eye.
    -3 having an excellent eye.
    (-क्षः) 1 a crow.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -अक्षर a. monosyllabic. ओमित्येकाक्षरं ब्रह्म Bg.8.13.
    (-रम्) 1 a monosyllable.
    -2 the sacred syllable; ओम्; एकाक्षरं परं ब्रह्म Ms.2.83.
    -3 The sole imperishable thing; एका- क्षरमभिसंभूय Av.5.28.8.
    -4 N. of an Upaniṣad. ˚कोशः a vocabulary of monosyllabic words by Puruṣottama- deva. ˚रीभावः the production of only one syllable, con- traction.
    -अग्नि a. Keeping only one fire; Āpastamba Dharma Sūtra 2.21.21. (
    -कः) One and the same fire.
    -अग्र a.
    1 fixed on one object or point only.
    -2 closely attentive, concentrated, intent; तद्गीतश्रवणैकाग्रा R.15.66; K.49; कच्चिदेतच्छ्रुतं पार्थ त्वयैकाग्रेण चेतसा Bg.18.72; मनुमे- काग्रमासीनम् Ms.1.1.
    -3 unperplexed.
    -4 known, cele- brated.
    -5 single-pointed. (
    -ग्रः) (in Math.) the whole of the long side of a figure which is subdivided. ˚चित्त, ˚मनस् a. with a concentrated mind, with un- divided attention. ˚चित्तम्, ˚चित्तता intentness of purpose, concentration of mind; तत्रैकाग्रं मनःकृत्वा Bg.6.12;18.72. °reeदृष्टि a. fixing one's eye on one spot.
    -अग्ऱ्य = ˚अग्र. (
    -ग्ऱ्यम्) concentration.
    -अङ्गः 1 a body-guard.
    -2 the planet Mercury or Mars.
    -3 N. of Viṣṇu. ˚वधः Mutilation of a limb; Kau. A.4.
    -4 Having a unique or beautiful shape.
    (-अङ्गम्) 1 a single member or part.
    -2 sandal wood.
    -3 the head. (
    -ङ्गौ) a married couple. (
    -ङ्गी) Incomplete; ˚रूपक incomplete, simile.
    -अञ्जलिः A handful.
    -अङ्गिका preparation made with sandal-wood.
    -अण्डः a kind of horse.
    -अधिपतिः a sole monarch or sovereign.
    -अनंशा the only (day) receiving no part of the moon, an epithet of Kuhū or day of new moon (born together with Kṛiṣṇa and worshipped with Kṛiṣ&na and Bala- deva and identified with Durgā).
    -अनुदिष्ट a.
    1 left as a funeral feast or one who has recently partaken in it. (
    -ष्टम्) a funeral ceremony performed for only one ancestor (recently dead); see एकोद्दिष्ट; यावदेकानुदिष्टस्य गन्धो लेपश्च तिष्ठति Ms.4.111.
    -अन्त a.
    1 solitary, retired.
    -2 aside, apart.
    -3 directed towards one point or object only.
    -4 excessive, great; ˚शैत्यात्- कदलीविशेषाः Ku.1.36.
    -5 worshipping only one; devoted to only one (एकनिष्ठ); एकान्तजनप्रियः Bhāg.8.24.31.
    -6 absolute, invariable, perpetual; स्वायत्तमेकान्तगुणम् Bh.2.7; कस्यैकान्तं सुखमुपगतम् Me.111.
    (-तः) 1 a lonely or retired place, solitude; तासामेकान्तविन्यस्ते शयानां शयने द्युमे Rām.5.1.5. व्योम˚ विहारिणः Pt.2.2; H.1.49.
    -2 exclusiveness.
    -3 an invariable rule or course of conduct or action; तस्मादेकान्तमासाद्य Pt.3.7.
    -4 exclusive aim or boundary. (
    -तम्) an exclusive recourse, a settled rule or principle; तेजः क्षमा वा नैकान्तं काल- ज्ञस्य महीपतेः Śi.2.83. (
    -तम्, -तेन, -ततः, -ते) ind.
    1 solely, exclusively, invariably, always, absolutely, युद्धे नैकान्तेन भवेज्जयः Mb.5.64.27.
    -2 exceeding, quite, wholly, very much; वयमप्येकान्ततो निःस्पृहाः Bh.3.24; दुःखमेकान्ततो वा Me.111; oft. in comp.; ˚विध्वंसिन् sure or destined to perish; R.2.57; ˚भीरु Mu. 3.5 always timid; so एकान्तकरुण very weak &c.
    -3 alone, apart, privately. ˚भूत being alone or solitary; विलोक्यैकान्तभूतानि भूतान्यादौ प्रजापतिः Bhāg.6.18.3. ˚मति a. devoted to one object only. ˚विहारिन् a. a solitary wanderer. ˚सुषमा 'containing exclusively good years', a division of time with Jainas. ˚स्थित a. staying or remaining apart.
    -अन्तर a. next but one, separated by one remove; द्वन्द्वं दक्षमरीचिसंभवमिदं तत्स्रष्टुरेकान्तरम् Ś.7.27; V.1. (
    -रः) a kind of fever.
    -अन्तिक a. final, conclusive.
    -अन्तित्वम् devotion to one object.
    -अन्तिन् a. devoted to one object only; अहो अत्यद्भुतं ह्येतद् दुर्लभैकान्ति- नामपि Bhāg.7.1.15. -m. a worshipper of Viṣṇu.
    -अन्नम् one and the same food.
    (-न्नः), -˚आदिन् 1 a mess-mate.
    -2 One who lives on the alms from only one house; नैकान्नादी भवेद् व्रती Ms.2.188.
    -अपचयः, अपायः Diminution by one.
    -अब्दा a heifer one year old.
    1 passable for only one (as a foot-path) Mb.3.
    -2 fixing one's thoughts on one object, closely attentive, intent; see एकाग्र.
    (-नम्) 1 a lonely or retired place; एकायनगतः पथि Mb.1.176.5; Rām. 3.67.23.
    -2 a meeting-place, rendezvous. सर्वासामपां समुद्र एकायनम् Bṛi. Up.2.4.11.
    -3 union of thoughts.
    -4 monotheism.
    -5 the sole object; सा स्नेहस्य एकायनीभूता M.2.14; एकायनीभूय Mv.4 with one accord, unani- mously.
    -6 One and the same way, similarity; एकमेवायनगताः प्लवमाना गिरेर्गिरम् Rām.4.2.9.
    -7 Worldly wisdom (नीतिशास्त्र); नाम वै एकायनम् Ch. Up.7.1.2. ˚गत = एकायन q. v. तरुणः सुकृतैर्युक्त एकायनगतश्च ह Mb.7.12.22. ˚स्थः With only one resource open, driven to extremity; शूरश्चैकायनस्थश्च किमन्यत्प्रतिपद्यते Pratijñā.1.7.
    -अर्णवः general flood, universal deluge; अयं ह्युत्सहते क्रुद्धः कर्तुमे- कार्णवं जगत् Rām.5.49.2.
    -अर्थ a.
    1 having one and the same meaning, having the same object in view; राजन्यकान्युपायज्ञैरेकार्थानि चरैस्तव Śi.2.114.
    -2 (Rhet.) Tautological (as a sentence); Kāvyālaṅkāravṛitti. 2.1.11.
    (-र्थः) 1 the same thing, object, or intention.
    -2 the same meaning.
    -3 N. of a glossary (of synonymous words); cf. एकार्थनाममाला.
    - अवम a. inferior or less by one.
    - अवयव a. made up of the same components.
    -अशीत or ˚तितम a. eighty-first.
    -अशीतिः f. eighty-one.
    -अष्टका 1 the first or chief Aṣṭakā after the full moon; एकाष्टके सुप्रजसः सुवीरा Av.3.1.5.
    -2 the eighth day of the dark fortnight in the month of Māgha (on which a श्राद्ध is to be performed).
    -अष्ठीका (ला) The root of the trumpet-flower (Mar. पहाडमूळ).
    -अष्ठील a. having one kernel. (
    -लः) N. of a plant (बकवृक्ष); A white variety of Gigantic swallow- wort (Mar. रुईमांदार).
    -अहन् (ह) 1 the period of one day.
    -2 a sacrifice lasting for one day. ˚गमः, ˚अध्वा a day's journey.
    -आतपत्र a. characterized by only one umbrella (showing universal sovereignty); एकातपत्रं जगतः प्रभुत्वम् R.2.47. ˚त्रां भुवम् 18.4; K.26; Śi.12. 33; V.3.19.
    -आत्मन् a. depending solely on one-self, solitary.
    -आदेशः cf. Sk. on P.VI.1.11. one substitute for two or more letters (got by either dropping one vowel, or by the blending of both); as the आ in एकायन.
    -आयु a.
    1 providing the most excellent food.
    -2 the first living being. एकायुरग्रे विश आविवाससि Rv.1.31.5.
    -आवलिः, -ली f.
    1 a single string of pearls, beads &c.; सूत्रमेकावली शुद्धा Kau. A.2.11. एका- वली कण्ठविभूषणं वः Vikr.1.3; लताविटपे एकावली लग्ना V.1.
    -2 (in Rhetoric) Necklace- a series of statements in which there is a regular transition from a predicate to a subject, or from a subject to a predicate; स्थाप्यते$पोह्यते वापि यथापूर्वं परस्परम् । विशेषणतया यत्र वस्तु सैकावली द्विधा ॥ K. P.1; cf. Chandr.5.13-4; नेत्रे कर्णान्तविश्रान्ते कर्णो दोःस्तम्भदोलितौ &c. and Bk.2.19.
    -आहार्य a. having the same food; making no difference between allowed and forbidden food; एकहार्यं युगं सर्वम् Mb.3.19.41.
    -उक्तिः f. a single expression or word.
    -उत्तर a. greater or increasing by one.
    -उदकः (a relative) connected by the offering of funeral libations of water to the same deceased ancestor; जन्मन्येकोदकानां तु त्रिरात्राच्छुद्धिरिष्यते Ms.5.71.
    -उदरः, -रा uterine, (brother or sister).
    -उदात्त a. having one Udātta accent.
    -उद्दिष्टम् a Śrāddha or funeral rite performed for one definite individual deceased, not including other ancestors; see एकानुदिष्ट.
    -ऊन a. less by one, minus one.
    -ऋच् a. consisting of one verse (ऋच्). (
    -चम्) A Sūkta of one verse only; Av.19.23.2.
    -एक a. one by one, one taken singly, a single one; एकैकमप्यनर्थाय किमु यत्र चतुष्टयम् H. Pr.11; R.17.43.
    (-कम्), -एकैकशः, ind. one by one, singly, severally एकैकमत्र दिवसे दिवसे Ś.6.11; ˚कं निर्दिशन् Ś.7 pointing to each severally.
    -श्यम् (एककश्यम्) Single state, severally एकैकश्येनानुपूर्वं भूत्वा भूत्वेह जायते Bhāg.7.15.51.
    -˚श्येन (instrumental used as an adv.) individually, singly, one by one. ते यदि एकैकश्येनापि कुर्वन्ति तथापि सत्रक्रियामभिसमीक्ष्य बहव एव कुर्वन्तीति बहुवचनं भविष्यति । ŚB on MS.1.6.45.
    -ओघः 1 a continuous current.
    -2 A single flight (of arrows); एकौघेन स्वर्णपुङ्खैर्द्विषन्तः (आकिरन्ति स्म) Śi. 18.55.
    -कपाल a. consisting of or contained in one cup.
    -कर a. (
    -री f.)
    1 doing only one thing.
    -2 (-रा) one-handed.
    -3 one-rayed.
    -कार्य a.
    1 acting in concert with, co-operating, having made common cause with; co-worker; अस्माभिः सहैककार्याणाम् Mu.2; R.1.4.
    -2 answering the same end.
    -3 having the same occu- pation. (
    -र्यम्) sole or same business.
    -कालः 1 one time.
    -2 the same time, (
    -लम्, -ले) ind. at one time, at one and the same time; एककालं चरेद्भैक्षम् Ms.6.55. ˚भोजनम् eating but one meal in any given time.
    -कालिकम् Once a day; तेभ्यो लब्धेन भैक्ष्येण वर्तयन्नेककालिकम् Ms.11.123.
    -कालीन a.
    1 happening once only;
    -2 Contemporary, coeval.
    -कुण्डलः (लिन्) N. of Kubera; of Balabhadra and Śeṣa; गर्गस्रोतो महातीर्थमाजगामैककुण्डली Mb.9.37.14. cf. एककुण्डल आख्यातो बलरामे धनाधिपे Medini.
    -कुष्ठम् a kind of leprosy; कृष्णारुणं येन भवे- च्छरीरं तदेककुष्ठं प्रवदन्त्यसाध्यम् Suśr.
    -क्षीरम् the milk of one (nurse &c.).
    -गम्यः the supreme spirit.
    -गुरु, गुरुक a. having the same preceptor. (
    -रुः, -रुकः) a spiritual brother (pupil of the same preceptor).
    -ग्राम a. living in the same village. (
    -मः) the same village.
    -ग्रामीण a. Inhabiting the same village; नैकग्रामीणमतिथिम् Ms.3.13.
    -चक्र a.
    1 having only one wheel. (said of the sun's chariot); सप्त युञ्जन्ति रथमेक- चक्रम् Rv.1.164.2.
    -2 governed by one king only. (
    -क्रः) the chariot of the sun. ˚वर्तिन् m. sole master of the whole universe, universal monarch. (
    -क्रा) N. of the town Kīchakas.
    -चत्वारिंशत् f. forty-one.
    -चर a.
    1 wandering or living alone, alone; अयमेकचरो$ भिवर्तते माम् Ki.13.3;3.53. Kau. A.1.18. स्वच्छन्दमेकचरं Mudrā.
    -2 having one attendant.
    -3 living un- assisted.
    -4 going together or at the same time.
    -5 gregarious.
    -6 (Said of certain animals); न भक्षयेदेकचरान् Ms.5.17; Bhāg.5.8.18.
    (-रः) 1 a rhinoceros.
    -2 An ascetic (यति); नाराजके जनपदे चरत्येकचरो वशी Rām.2.67.23.
    - चरण a. having only one foot.
    -चारिन् a.
    1 living alone, solitary.
    -2 going alone or with one follower only.
    -3 An atten- dant of Buddha. (
    -णी) a loyal wife.
    -चित्त a. thinking of one thing only, absorbed in one object.
    (-त्तम्) 1 fixedness of thought upon one object.
    -2 unanimity एकचित्तीभूय H.1 unanimously; ˚ता fixedness of mind, agreement, unanimity.
    -चिन्तनम् thinking of only one object.
    -चिन्मय a. Consisting of intelligence; Rāmt. Up.
    -चेतस्, -मनस् a. unanimous; see ˚चित्त.
    -चोदन a. Resting upon one rule. (
    -नम्) referring to in the singular number.
    -च्छत्र a. Ruled by one king solely.
    -च्छायाश्रित a. Involved in similarity (of debt) with one debtor (said of a surety); Y.2.56.
    -ज a.
    1 born alone or single.
    -2 growing alone (a tree); महानप्येकजो वृक्षो बलवान्सुप्रतिष्ठितः Pt.3.54.
    -3 alone of its kind.
    -4 uniform, unchanging.
    -जः, -जा a brother or sister of the same parents.
    -जटा N. of a goddess उग्रतारा.
    -जन्मन् m.
    1 a king.
    -2 a Śūdra; see ˚जाति below.
    -जात a. born of the same parents; Ms.9.148.
    -जाति a.
    1 once born.
    -2 belonging to the same family or caste. (
    -तिः) a Śūdra (opp. द्विजन्मन्); ब्राह्मणः क्षत्रियो वैश्यस्त्रयो वर्णा द्विजातयः । चतुर्थ एकजातिस्तु शूद्रो नास्ति तु पञ्चमः ॥ Ms.1.4;8.27.
    -जातीय a. of the same kind, species or family. ˚अनुसमयः performance of one detail with reference to all things or persons, then doing the second, then the third and so on (see पदार्थानुसमय) Ms.5.2.1-2.
    -जीववादः (in phil.) the assertion of a living soul only.
    -ज्या the chord of an arc; sine of 3˚.
    -ज्योतिस् m. N. of Śiva.
    -तान a. con- centrated or fixed on one object only, closely attentive; ब्रह्मैकतानमनसो हि वसिष्ठमिश्राः Mv.3.11.
    (-नः) 1 atten- tion fixed on one object only; A. Rām.6.2.2.
    -2 musical harmony, = ˚तालः
    -ताल a. Having a single palm tree; एकताल एवोत्पातपवनप्रेरितो गिरिः R.15.23.
    -तालः harmony, accurate adjustment of song, dance, and instrumental music (cf. तौर्यत्रिकम्).
    -लम् A kind of sculptural measurement. (
    -ली) an instrument for beating time, any instrument having but one note.
    -तीर्थिन् a.
    1 bathing in the same holy water.
    -2 belonging to the same religious order; क्रमेणाचार्यसच्छिष्य- धर्मभ्रात्रेकतीर्थिनः Y.2.137. -m. a fellow student, spiritual brother.
    -तेजन a. Ved. having only one shaft (an arrow).
    -त्रिंशत् f. thirty-one; ˚त्रिंश 31st.
    -त्रिकः a kind of sacrifice performed in or lasting for a day.
    -दंष्ट्रः, -दन्तः "one-tusked", epithets of Gaṇeśa (एकदंष्ट्रः) A kind of fever.
    -दण्डिन् m.
    1 N. of a class of Sannyāsins or beggars (otherwise called हंस). They are divided into four orders:-- कुटीचको बहूदको हंसश्चैव तृतीयकः । चतुर्थः परहंसश्च यो यः पश्चात्स उत्तमः ॥ Hārita.
    -2 N. of a Vedantic school.
    -दलः, -पत्रः N. of a plant (चन्डालकन्द).
    -दिश् a. living in the same region or quarter.
    -दुःखसुख a. sympathising, having the same joys and sorrows.
    -दृश्, -दृष्टि a. one-eyed. -m.
    1 a crow.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -3 a philosopher.
    -दृश्य a. the sole object of vision, alone being worthy of being seen. तमेकदृश्यं नयनैः पिबन्त्यो Ku.7.64.
    -दृष्टिः f. fixed or steady look.
    -देवः the Supreme god.
    -देवत, -दे(दै)वत्य a. devoted, directed or offered to one deity.
    -देश a. occupying the same place.
    (-शः) 1 one spot or place.
    -2 a part or portion (of the whole), one side; ˚अवतीर्णा K.22; तस्यैकदेशः U.4; Mv.2; विभावितैकदेशेन देयं यदभियुज्यते V.4.33 'what is claimed should be given by one who is proved to have got a part of it'; (this is sometimes called एकदेशविभावितन्याय) ˚क्षाण a. partly burnt. एकदेशक्षाणमपि क्षाणमेव । ŚB. on MS.6.4.18.
    -देशिन् a. consisting of parts or portions divided into parts. -m. A disputant knowing only part of the true state of the case.
    -देह, -देहिन् a.
    1 having only one body.
    -2 elegantly formed.
    (-हः) 1 the planet Mercury.
    -2 (du.) Husband and wife.
    -धनः a kind of jug with which water is taken up at certain religious ceremonies.
    (-नम्) 1 an excellent gift.
    -2 honorific offering.
    -धनिन् a. obtaining an honorific offering,
    -धर्मन्, -धर्मिन् a.
    1 possessing the same properties of the same kind.
    -2 professing the same religion.
    -धुर, -धुरावह, -धुरीण a.
    1 fit for but one kind of labour.
    -2 fit for but one yoke (as cattle for special burden; P.IV.4.79).
    -धुरा a particular load or con- veyance.
    -नक्षत्रम् a lunar mansion consisting of only one star.
    -नटः the principal actor in a drama, the manager (सूत्रधार) who recites the prologue.
    -नयनः The planet Venus.
    -नवतः ninety-first.
    -नवतिः f. ninety-one.
    -नाथ a. having one master.
    (-थः) 1 sole master or lord.
    -2 N. of an author.
    -नायकः N. of Śiva.
    -निश्चय a. come to the same conclusion or resolution, having the same aim. (
    -यः) general agreement or con- clusion, unanimity.
    -निपातः A particle which is a single word.
    -निष्ठ a.
    1 intently devoted or loyal (to one thing).
    -2 intently fixed on one object.
    -नेत्रः 1 N. of Śiva; (one-eyed).
    -2 (With Śaivas) One of the eight forms of Vidyeśvara.
    -पक्ष a.
    1 of the same side or party, an associate.
    -2 partial. (
    -क्षः) one side or party; ˚आश्रयविक्लवत्वात् R.14.34; ˚क्षे in one point of view, in one case.
    -पक्षीभावः The state of being the one alternative.
    -पञ्चाशत् f. fifty-one.
    -पतिक a. having the same husband.
    -पत्नी 1 a faithful wife (perfectly chaste); तां चावश्यं दिवसगणनातत्परामेकपत्नीम् Me.1.
    -2 the wife of a man who has no other wives; यो धर्म एकपत्नीनां काङ्क्षन्ती तमनुत्तमम् Ms.5.158.
    -3 the wife of the same man; a co-wife; सर्वासामेकपत्नीनामेका चेत्पुत्रिणी भवेत् Ms.9. 183. ˚व्रतम् a vow of perfect chastity; कामेकपत्नीव्रतदुःख- शीलाम् Ku.3.7.
    -पत्रिका the plant Ocimum Gratissimum (गन्धपत्रा; Mar. नागदवणी)
    -पद्, -पाद् a.
    1 one-footed, limping, lame.
    -2 incomplete. (
    -पाद्) m. N. of Śiva or Viṣṇu. (
    -पदी) a foot-path (for a single man to walk on). एकपद्या तया यान्ती नलिकायन्त्रतुल्यया Śiva. B.28.66
    -पद a.
    1 one-footed.
    -2 consisting of or named in one word.
    (-दम्) 1 a single step.
    -2 single or simple word.
    -3 the time required to pronounce a single word.
    -4 present time, same time;
    (-दः) 1 a man having one foot.
    -2 a kind of coitus (रतिबन्ध). (
    -दे) ind. sudden- ly, all at once, abruptly; निहन्त्यरीनेकपदे य उदात्तः स्वरानिव Śi.2.95; R.8.48; K.45; V.4.3. (
    -दा) a verse con- sisting of only one Pāda or quarter stanza.
    (-दी) 1 a woman having one foot.
    -2 a Gāyatrī consisting of one Pāda. गायत्र्यस्येकपदी Bṛi. Up.5.14.7.
    -3 Foot-path (Mar. पाऊलवाट); इयमेकपदी राजन्यतो मे पितुराश्रमः Rām. 2.63.44.
    -पर a. Ved. an epithet of the dice in which one is decisive or of pre-eminent importance.
    -परि ind. one over or under, (a term at dice; cf. अक्षपरि). अक्षस्याह- मेकहरस्य हेतोः Rv.1.34.2.
    -पर्णा 1 N. of a younger sister of Durgā.
    -2 N. of Durgā.
    -3 a plant having one leaf only.
    -पलाशः a. a single Butea Frondosa.
    -पाटला N. of a younger sister of Durgā; N. of Durgā.
    -पाणः a single wager.
    -पात a. happening at once, sudden.
    -तः The first word of a Mantra (प्रतीक).
    -पतिन् a.
    1 sudden.
    -2 standing alone or solitary. (
    -नी) i. e. ऋक् a verse to be taken by itself or independently of the hymn to which it belongs.
    -पाद a.
    1 having only one foot; तत्र शिश्रिये$ज एकपादः Av.13.1.6.
    -2 using only one foot.
    (-दः) 1 one or single foot.
    -2 one and the same Pāda.
    -3 N. of Viṣṇu and Śiva.
    -पादिका a kind of posture of birds.
    -पार्थिवः Sole ruler or king; न केवलं तद्गुरुरेक- पार्थिवः R.3.31.
    -पिङ्गः, -पिङ्गलः N. of Kubera; having a yellow mark in place of one eye; (his eye was so made on account of a curse uttered by Pārvatī when he cast an evil eye at her;) Dk.2.4.
    -पिण्ड a. united by the offering of the funeral rice-ball;
    ˚ता, -त्वम् consanguinity.
    -पुत्र a. having only one son.
    -पुरुषः 1 the Supreme Being; वेदान्तेषु यमाहुरेकपुरुषम् V.1.1;
    -2 the chief person. a. Consisting of only one man. तथैकपुरुषं राष्ट्रम् Bhāg.6.5.7.
    -पुष्कलः (रः) N. of a musical instrument (Mar. काहल); ततः प्रयाते दाशार्हे प्रावाद्यन्तैकपुष्कराः Mb.5.94.21.
    -प्रकार a. of the same kind.
    -प्रख्य a. singularly like.
    -प्रभुत्वम् sole sovereignty.
    -प्रयत्नः one effort (of the voice).
    -प्रस्थः a measure.
    -प्रहारिक a. killed by one blow. Mk.8.
    -प्राणयोगः union in one breath.
    -बुद्धि a. having only one thought.
    -भक्त a.
    1 serving one master only.
    -2 worshipping one deity.
    -3 eating together. (
    -भूक्तम्) N. of a religi- ous ceremony; eating but one meal (a day) Mb.3; Y.3.318. ˚व्रतम् eating but once a day as a religious observance.
    -भक्ति a.
    1 believing in one deity.
    -2 firmly devoted; तेषां ज्ञानी नित्ययुक्त एकभक्तिर्विशिष्यते Bg.7. 17. -f. eating but one meal a day.
    -भार्या a faithful or chaste wife. तामेकभार्यां परिवादभीरोः R.14.86 (
    -र्यः) one having one wife only.
    -भाव a. of the same or one nature.
    -2 sincerely devoted.
    -3 honest, sincerely disposed.
    (-वः) 1 one feeling, the same or unchanged devotion; दुर्ग्राह्यत्वान्नृपतिमनसां नैकभावाश्रयाणां सेवाधर्मः परमगहनः Pt.1.285;3.65. स्वतेजसा सत्त्वगुणप्रवाहमात्मैकभावेन भजध्वमद्धा Bhāg.
    -2 oneness, agreement. cf. एको भावः सदा शस्तो यतीनां भवितात्मनाम्
    -भूत a.
    1 being one, undivided
    -2 concentrated, closely attentive.
    -भूमः a palace having one floor.
    -भोजन, -भुक्त a.
    1 eating but one meal.
    -2 eating in common.
    -मति a.
    1 fixed on one object.
    -2 unanimous, thinking in the same way.
    -मनस् a. thinking with another, of one thought; ते निर्यान्तु मया सहैकमनसो येषामभीष्टं यशः Mu.2.13.
    -2 fixing the mind upon one object, closely attentive; गच्छन्तमेकमनसम् Mb.1.42.36. एकमनाः श्रोतुमर्हति देवः M.2.
    -मात्र a. of one syllable.
    -मुख a.
    1 having the face directed towards one place, direction of object; सहस्रं स एकमुखो ददाति Av.9.4.9.
    -2 having the same aim.
    -3 having one chief or head; द्यूतमेकमुखं कार्यम् Y.2.23.
    -4 having one door or entrance (as a मण्डप).
    (-खम्) 1 gambling.
    -2 a kind of fruit (रुद्राक्षफल).
    -मूर्धन् = ˚मुख q. v. Av.8.9.15.
    -मूला = अतसी q. v.
    -यष्टिः, -यष्टिका a single string of pearls.
    -योनि a.
    1 uterine.
    -2 of the same family or caste; एतद्विधानं विज्ञेयं विभाग- स्यैकयोनिषु Ms.9.148.
    -रजः the plant भृङ्गराज (Mar. माका).
    -रथः An eminent warrior; Mb.3.
    -रश्मि a. Lustrous Mb.4.
    -रस a.
    1 finding pleasure only in one thing, of one flavour; रसान्तराण्येकरसं यथा दिव्यं पयो$श्नुते R.1.17.
    -2 of one feeling or sentiment only; साहस˚ U.5.21 influenced only by rashness; विक्रम˚ K.7; भावैकरसं मनः Ku.5.82; M.3.1; Bv.2.155; Śi.6.26; V.1.9.
    -3 of one tenor, stable, equable; Māl.4.7; U.4.15.
    -4 solely or exclusively devoted (to one); अबलैकरसाः R.9.43,8.65.
    (-सः) 1 oneness of aim or feeling.
    -2 the only flavour or pleasure. (
    -सम्) a drama of one sentiment.
    -राज्, -राजः m. an absolute king; प्राङ् विशाम्पतिरेकराट् त्वं वि राज Av.3.4.1. a. Shining alone, alone visible; स वा एष तदा द्रष्टा नाप- श्यद् दृश्यमेकराट् Bhāg.3.5.24.
    -रात्रः a ceremony lasting one night. (
    -त्रम्) one night; एकरात्रं तु निवसन्नतिथिर्ब्राह्मणः स्मृतः Ms.3.12.
    -रात्रिक a. lasting or sufficient for one night only.
    -राशिः 1 a heap, crowd.
    -2 a sign of the zodiac. ˚भूत a. collected or heaped together.
    -रिक्थिन् m. a coheir; यद्येकरिक्थिनौ स्यातामौरसक्षेत्रजौ सुतौ Ms.9.162.
    -रूप a.
    1 of one form or kind, like, similar; आसवः प्रतिपदं प्रमदानां नैकरूपरसतामिव भेजे Ki.9.55.
    -2 uniform, one-coloured; Rv.1.169.2.
    (-पम्) 1 one form or kind;
    -2 The knowledge of reality. विमोचयत्येकरूपेण Sāṅ. K.63. ˚ता uniformity, invariableness; क्षणद्युतीनां दधुरेकरूपताम् Ki.8.2.
    -रूप्य a. formed or arising from one.
    -लिङ्गः 1 a word having one gender only.
    -2 N. of Kubera. (
    -ङ्गम्) a place in which for five krośas there is but one लिङ्ग (Phallus); पञ्चक्रोशान्तरे यत्र न लिङ्गान्तरमीक्ष्यते । तदेकलिङ्गमाख्यातं तत्र सिद्धिरनुत्तमा ॥ Śabdak.
    -वचनम् the singular number.
    -वर्ण a.
    1 of one colour.
    -2 identical, same.
    -3 of one tribe or caste.
    -4 involving the use of one letter (˚समीकरण).
    (-र्णः) 1 one form.
    -2 a Brāhmaṇa.
    -3 a word of one syllable.
    -4 a superior caste. (
    -र्णी) beating time, the instru- ment (castanet); ˚समीकरणम् an equation involving one unknown quantity.
    -वर्णिक a.
    1 of one colour.
    -2 of one caste.
    -वर्षिका a heifer one year old.
    -वस्त्र, -वसन a. having only one garment, in one dress (without उत्तरीय). (
    -स्त्रम्) a single garment.
    -वाक्यम् one or unanimous opinion; एकवाक्यं विवव्रः R.6.85 raised a unanimous cry; ˚ता consistency in meaning, unanimity, reconciling different statements, syntactical unity; प्रकरणाच्च ज्योतिष्टोमेनैकवाक्यता स्यात् । ŚB. on MS.1. 5.37.
    -वाक्यकृ 8 U. To effect syntactical unity, to construe as one sentence. तस्मात् प्रकृतानां... देवतानामन्यतमया देवतया प्रकृतत्वादेकवाक्यतां कृत्वा देवतामवगमिष्यामः । ŚB. on MS.1. 8.5.
    -वाक्यया 2 P. (with instrumental) To form one sentence with, to be syntactically connected with; न वै कृतं कर्म प्राकृतैरङ्गपदार्थैः सहैकवाक्यतां याति । ŚB. on MS.1. 1.2.
    ˚त्वम् syntactical unity. The state of forming or being one sentence; एकवाक्यत्वाच्च । Ms.1.1.8.
    -वाचक a. Synonymous.
    -वादः 1 a kind of drum or tabor (Mar. डफ).
    -2 the unitarian doctrine, monotheism.
    -वारम्, -वारे ind.
    1 only once.
    -2 at once, suddenly.
    -3 at one time.
    -वासस् a. Clothed in only one garment.
    -वासा A woman; Nigh.
    -विंश a. twenty-first; consisting of twentyone. (
    -शः) the Ekaviṁśa- ṣ&tod;oma; Av.8.9.2.
    -विंशक a. The twentyfirst; दश पूर्वान्परान् वंश्यानात्मानं चैकविंशकम् । ब्राह्मीपुत्रः सुकृतकृन्मोचयेदेनसः पितॄन् ॥ Ms.3.37.
    -कम् The number twentyone; Y.3.224.
    -विंशतिः f. twentyone.
    -विजयः Complete victory; Kau. A.12.
    -विध a. of one kind; simple.
    -विलोचन a. one-eyed; see एकदृष्टि.
    -विषयिन् m. a rival (having a common object or end in view).
    -वीरः a pre-eminent warrior or hero; धर्म˚ Mv.5.48.
    -रा N. of a daughter of Śiva, a deity.
    -वृक्षः 1 one tree.
    -2 a district in which but one tree is seen for 4 Krośas.
    -वृत f. heaven.
    -वृन्दम 1 a peculiar disease of the throat.
    -2 one heap or collection.
    -वृषः Ved. the chief bull; the best or most excellent of a number.
    -वेणिः, -णी f. a single braid of hair (worn by a woman as a mark of her separation from her hus- band &c.); गण्डाभोगात्कठिनविषमामेकवेणीं करेण Me.93; ˚धरा Ś.7; धृत˚ Ś.7.21.
    -वेश्मन् n. a solitary house or room; विप्रदुष्टां स्त्रियं भर्ता निरुन्ध्यादेकवेश्मनि Ms.11.176.
    -व्यवसायिन् a. following the same profession.
    -व्याव- हारिकाः N. of a Buddhist school.
    -शत a. 11 st. (
    -तम्) 11; अत्रैतदेकशतं नाडीनां Prasna. Up.3.6.
    -शक a. whole-hoofed. (
    -फः) an animal whose hoof is not cloven (as a horse, ass &c.); अजाविकं सैकशफं न जातु विषमं भजेत् Ms.9.119.
    -शरणम् the sole recourse or refuge (especially applied to a deity).
    -शरीर a. of one body or blood, consanguineous. ˚अन्वयः consan- guineous descent. ˚अवयवः a descendant in a right line, blood-kinsman. ˚आरम्भः commencement of consangui- nity by the union of father and mother.
    -शल्यः A kind of fish; Rām.5.11.17.
    -शाख a. having one branch. (
    -खः) a Brāhmaṇa of the same branch or school.
    -शायिन् a. Sleeping alone, chaste; Mb.13.
    -शाला A single hall or room; (
    -लम् A house consisting of one hall; Matsya P.
    -शीर्षन् = ˚मुख q. v. Av.13.4.6.
    -शुङ्ग a. having one sheath. (
    -ङ्गा) N. of a medicinal plant.
    -शुल्कम् One and the same purchase money (given to the parents of a bride); अन्यां चेद्दर्शयित्वा$न्या वोढुः कन्या प्रदीयते । उभे ते एकशुल्केन वहेदित्यब्रवीन्मनुः ॥ Ms.8.24.
    -शृङ्ग a. having only one horn.
    (-ङ्गः) 1 a unicorn; rhinoceros.
    -2 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -3 a class of Pitṛis.
    -4 a mountain having one top.
    -शेपः a tree having one root.
    -शेषः 'the remainder of one', a species of Dvandva compound in which one of two or more words only is retained; e. g. पितरौ father and mother, parents, (= मातापितरौ); so श्वशुरौः, भ्रातरः &c.
    -श्रुत a. once heard. ˚धर a. keeping in mind what one has heard once.
    -श्रुतिः f.
    1 monotony.
    -2 the neutral accentless tone. (
    -ति) ind. in a monotonous manner.
    -श्रुष्टि a. Ved. obedient to one command.
    -षष्ट a. sixty-first.
    -षष्टिः f. sixty-one. ˚तम a. sixty first.
    -संस्थ a. dwelling in one place; R.6.29.
    -सप्तत, ˚तितम् a. seventy-first.
    -सप्ततिः f. seventy-one.
    -सभम् a common place of meeting.
    -सर्ग a. closely attentive. (
    -र्गः) concentration.
    -सहस्रम् 11 or one thousand; वृषभैकसहस्रा गा दद्यात्सुचरितव्रतः Ms.11.127.
    -साक्षिक a. witnessed by one.
    -सार्थम् ind. together, in one company.
    -सूत्रम् N. of a small double drum played by a string and ball attached to the body of it (Mar. डमरू).
    -स्तोमः N. of Soma ceremony.
    -स्थ a.
    1 being or centred in one place; in one man; ज्ञानमेकस्थमाचार्ये...... शौर्यमेकस्थमाचार्ये Mb.7.188.45. Ku. 1.49; हन्तैकस्थं क्वचिदपि न ते चण्डि सादृश्यमस्ति Me.16.
    -2 close-standing, standing side by side.
    -3 collected, combined.
    -स्थानम् one or the same place; एकस्थाने प्रसूते वाक् Pt.4.5.
    -2 Standing closely; विपक्षेणापि मरुता यथैकस्थानवीरुधः Pt.3.53.
    -हंसः the chief or highest Haṁsa (an allegorical designation of the soul). हिरण्मयः पुरुष एकहंसः Bṛi. Up.4.3.11.
    -हायन a. one year old; त्रस्तैकहायनकुरङ्गविलोलदृष्टिः Māl.4.8; U.3.28. (
    -नी) a heifer one year old. (
    -नम्) the period of one year.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > लॄ _lॄ

  • 87 एलुकम् _ēlukam

    एलुकम् 1 A kind of perfume.
    -2 A medicinal substance or plant.
    *****1.
    एव a. Ved.
    1 Going, moving.
    -2 Speedy, quick; एवो गन्ता; ये च एवा मरुतः Uṇ.1.15.
    -वः 1 A course, way; or a courser, a fleet horse; स्वेभिरेवैश्चरतः Rv.1.62.8; (pl.) mode of proceeding, custom, habit; or according to Sāyaṇa a desire or hymn.
    -Comp. -या a. granting protection; or going in ways or courses.
    -यावन् a. going with horses or granting desires, going quickly. -m. N. of Viṣṇu.
    *****2.
    एव ind. This particle is most frequently used to strengthen and emphasize the idea expressed by a word:-- (1) Just, quite, exactly; एवमेव quite so, just so; (2) same, very, identical; अर्थोष्मणा विरहितः पुरुषः स एव Bh.2.4 that very man; (3) only, alone, merely, (implying exclusion); सा तथ्यमेवाभिहिता भवेन Ku.3.63 only the truth, nothing but the truth; so नाम्नैव, स एव वीरः he alone (and not others); (4) already; गत एव न ते निवर्तते Ku.4.3; (5) scarcely, the moment, as soon as; chiefly with participles; उपस्थि- तेयं कल्याणी नाम्नि कीर्तित एव यत् R.1.87 as soon as the name was uttered; इति चिन्तयन्नेव while just thinking &c; (6) also, likewise; तथैव so also; (7) like, as (showing similarity); श्रीस्त एव मेस्तु G. M. (= तव इव); and (8) generally to emphasize a statement; भवितव्यमेव तेन U.4 it will (surely) take place. It is also said to imply the senses of (9) detraction; (1) diminution (11) command; (12) restraint; or (13) used merely as an expletive. (This particle is used in the Vedas in the senses of so, just so, like, indeed, truly, really) (14) Again; एवशब्दश्च पुनरित्यस्मिन्नर्थे भविष्यति । यथा क्षीरेण भुक्त्त्वा देवदत्तः क्षीरेणैव भुञ्जीतेति । भुञ्जीतैवेति पुनरिति गम्यते । ŚB. on MS.1.8.36.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > एलुकम् _ēlukam

  • 88 त्रि _tri

    त्रि num. a. [Uṇ.5.66] (declined in pl. only, nom. त्रयः m., तिस्त्रः f., त्रीणि n.) Three; त एव हि त्रयो लोकास्त एव त्रय आश्रमाः &c. Ms.2.229; प्रियतमाभिरसौ तिसृभिर्बभौ R.9.18; त्रीणि वर्षाण्युदीक्षेत कुमार्यृतुमती सती Ms.9.9 [cf. L. tres; Gr. treis; A. S., Zend thri; Eng. three].
    -Comp. -अंशः 1 a three-fold share; त्र्यंशं दायाद्धरेद्विप्रः Ms.9.151.
    -2 a third part.
    -3 three-fourths.
    -अक्ष a. triocular.
    -अक्षः, -अक्षकः an epithet of Śiva; शुष्कस्नायु- स्वराह्लादात्त्र्यक्षं जग्राह रावणः Pt.5.57.
    -अक्षरः 1 the mystic syllable ओम् consisting of three letters; see under अ. आद्यं यत्त्र्यक्षरं ब्रह्म Ms.11.265.
    -2 a match- maker or घटक (that word consisting of three syllables).
    -3 a genealogist. (
    -री) knowledge, learning; see विद्या.
    -अङ्कटम्, -अङ्गटम् 1 three strings suspended to either end of a pole for carrying burdens.
    -2 a sort of colly- rium. (
    -टः) N. of Śiva.
    -अङ्गम् (pl.) a tripartite army (chariots, cavalry and infantry).
    -अङ्गुलम् three fingers' breadth.
    -अञ्जनम् the three kinds of collyrium; i. e. कालाञ्जन, रसाञ्जन and पुष्पाञ्जन.
    -अञ्जलम्, -लिः three handfuls taken collectively.
    -अधिपतिः (the lord of the 3 guṇas or worlds), an epithet of Viṣṇu; Bhāg.3.16.24.
    -अधिष्ठानः the soul. (
    नम्) spirit, life (चैतन्य). -a. having three stations; Ms.12.4.
    -अध्वगा, -मार्गगा, -वर्त्मगा epithets of the river Ganges (flowing through the three worlds).
    -अनीक a. having the three properties of heat, rain and cold; त्यनीकः पत्यते माहिनावान् Rv.3.56.3. (
    -का) an army consisting of horses, elephants and chariots.
    -अब्द a. three years old.
    -ब्दम् three years taken collectively.
    -अम्बकः (also त्रियम्बक in the same sense though rarely used in classical literature) 'having three eyes', N. of Śiva.; त्रियम्बकं संयमिनं ददर्श Ku.3.44; जडीकृतस्त्र्यम्बकवीक्षणेन R.2. 42;3.49. ˚सखः an epithet of Kubera; कुबेरस्त्र्यम्बकसखः Ak.
    -अम्बका an epithet of Pārvatī
    -अशीत a. eighty-third.
    -अशीतिः f. eighty-three.
    -अष्टन् a. twenty-four.
    -अश्र, -अस्र a. triangular. (
    -स्रम्) a triangle.
    -अहः 1 a period of three days.
    -2 a festival lasting three days.
    -आर्षेयाः deaf, dumb and blind persons.
    -आहिक a.
    1 performed or produced in three days.
    -2 recurring after the third day, tertian (as fever).
    -3 having provision for three days कुशूलकुम्भीधान्यो वा त्र्याहिको$श्वस्तनो$पि वा Y.1.128.
    -ऋचम् (
    तृचम् also) three Riks taken collectively; Ms.8.16.
    -ऐहिक a. having provision for three days.
    -ककुद् m.
    1 N. of the moun- tain Trikūṭa.
    -2 N. of Viṣnu or Kṛiṣṇa.
    -3 the highest, chief.
    -4 a sacrifice lasting for ten nights.
    -ककुभ् m. Ved.
    1 Indra.
    -2 Indra's thunderbolt.
    -कटु dry ginger, black pepper and long pepper taken together as a drug; शिरामोक्षं विधायास्य दद्यात् त्रिकटुकं गुडम् Śālihotra 62.
    -कण्टः, -कण्टकः a kind of fish.
    -करणी the side of a square 3 times as great as another.
    -कर्मन् n. the chief three duties of a Brāhmaṇa i. e. sacrifice, study of the Vedas, and making gifts or charity. (-m.) one who engages in these three duties (as a Brāhmaṇa).
    -काण्डम् N. of Amarsiṁha's dictionary.
    -कायः N. of Buddha.
    -कालम् 1 the three times; the past, the pre- sent, and the future; or morning, noon and evening.
    -2 the three tenses (the past, present, and future) of a verb. (
    -लम् ind. three times, thrice; ˚ज्ञ, ˚दर्शिन् a. omniscient (m.)
    1 a divine sage, seer.
    -2 a deity.
    -3 N. of Buddha. ˚विद् m.
    1 a Buddha.
    -2 an Arhat (with the Jainas).
    -कूटः N. of a mountain in Ceylon on the top of which was situated Laṅkā, the capital of Rāvaṇa.; Śi.2.5.
    -कूटम् sea-salt.
    कूर्चकम् a knife with three edges.
    -कोण a. triangular, forming a triangle.
    (-णः) 1 a triangle.
    -2 the vulva.
    -खम् 1 tin.
    -2 a cucumber.
    -खट्वम्, -खट्वी three bed- steads taken collectively.
    -क्षाराणि n. (pl.) salt-petre, natron and borax.
    -गणः an aggregate of the three objects of worldly existence; i. e. धर्म, अर्थ and काम; न बाधते$स्य त्रिगणः परस्परम् Ki.1.11; see त्रिवर्ग below.
    -गत a.
    1 tripled.
    -2 done in three days.
    -गर्ताः (pl.)
    1 N. of a country, also called जलन्धर, in the north- west of India.
    -2 the people or rulers of that country.
    -3 a particular mode of calculation.
    -गर्ता 1 a lascivious woman, wanton.
    -2 a woman in general.
    -3 a pearl.
    -4 a kind of cricket.
    -गुण a.
    1 consisting of three threads; व्रताय मौञ्जीं त्रिगुणां बभार याम् Ku.5.1.
    -2 three-times repeated, thrice, treble, threefold, triple; सप्त व्यतीयुस्त्रिगुणानि तस्य (दिनानि) R.2. 25.
    -3 containing the three Guṇas सत्त्व, रजस् and तमस्. (
    -णम्) the Pradhāna (in Sāṅ. phil.); (-ind.) three times; in three ways.
    -णाः m. (pl.) the three quali- ties or constituents of nature; त्रयीमयाय त्रिगुणात्मने नमः K.1.
    (-णा) 1 Māyā or illusion (in Vedānta phil.).
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -गुणाकृतम् ploughed thrice.
    -चक्षुस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -चतुर a. (pl.) three or four; गत्वा जवात्त्रिचतुराणि पदानि सीता B.R.6.34.
    -चत्वा- रिंश a. forty-third.
    -चत्वारिंशत् f, forty-three.
    -जगत् n.
    -जगती the three worlds, (1) the heaven, the atmos- phere and the earth; or (2) the heaven, the earth, and the lower world; त्वत्कीर्तिः...... त्रिजगति विहरत्येवमुर्वीश गुर्वी Sūkti.5.59.
    -जटः an epithet of Śiva.
    -जटा N. of a female demon, one of the Rākṣasa attendants kept by Rāvaṇa to watch over Sītā, when she was retained as a captive in the Aśoka-vanikā. She acted very kindly towards Sītā and induced her companions to do the same; सीतां मायेति शंसन्ति त्रिजटा समजीवयत् R.12.74.
    -जातम्, जातकम् The three spices (mace, cardamoms, cinnamon).
    -जीवा, -ज्या the sine of three signs or 9˚, a radius.
    -णता a bow; कामुकानिव नालीकांस्त्रिणताः सहसामुचन् Śi.19.61.
    -णव, -णवन् a. (pl.) three times nine; i. e. 27.
    -णाकः the heaven; तावत्त्रिणाकं नहुषः शशास Bhāg.6.13.16.
    -णाचिकेतः 1 a part of the Adhvaryu-sacrifice or Yajur- veda, or one who performs a vow connected therewith (according to Kull. on Ms.3.185); Mb.13.9.26.
    -2 one who has thrice kindled the Nāchiketa fire or studied the Nāchiketa section of Kāṭhaka; त्रिणाचिकेत- स्त्रिभिरेत्य सन्धिम् Kaṭh.1.17.
    -णीता a wife ('thrice married'; it being supposed that a girl belongs to Soma, Gandharva and Agni before she obtains a human husband).
    -णेमि a. with three fellies; विचिन्वतो$भूत् सुमहांस्त्रिणेमिः Bhāg.3.8.2.
    -तक्षम्, तक्षी three carpen- ters taken collectively.
    -दण्डम् 1 the three staves of a Saṁnyāsin (who has resigned the world) tied togethar so as to form one.
    -2 the triple subjection of thought, word, and deed. (
    -ण्डः) the state of a religious ascetic; ज्ञानवैराग्यरहितस्त्रिदण्डमुपजीवति Bhāg.11.18.4.
    -दण्डिन् m.
    1 a religious mendicant or Saṁnyāsin who has renounced all worldly attachments, and who carries three long staves tied together so as to form one in his right hand; तल्लिप्सुः स यतिर्भूत्वा त्रिदण्डी द्वारका- मगात् Bhāg.1.86.3.
    -2 one who has obtained command over his mind, speech, and body (or thought, word, and deed); cf. वाग्दण्डो$थ मनोदण्डः कायदण्डस्तथैव च । यस्यैते निहिता बुद्धौ त्रिदण्डीति स उच्यते ॥ Ms.12.1.
    -दशाः (pl.)
    1 thirty.
    -2 the thirty-three gods:-- 12 Ādityas, 8 Vasus, 11 Rudras and 2 Aśvins. (
    -शः) a god, an immortal; तस्मिन्मघोनस्त्रिदशान्विहाय सहस्रमक्ष्णां युगपत्पपात Ku.3.1. ˚अङ्कुशः (-शम्) the heaven. ˚आयुधम् Indra's thunder- bolt; R.9.54. ˚आयुधम् rainbow; अथ नभस्य इव त्रिदशायुधम् R.9.54. ˚अधिपः, ˚ईश्वरः, ˚पतिः epithets of Indra. ˚अधिपतिः N. of Śiva. ˚अध्यक्षः, ˚अयनः an epithet of Viṣṇu. ˚अरिः a demon. ˚आचार्यः an epithet of Bṛihas- pati. ˚आधार Nectar. ˚आलयः, ˚आवासः
    1 heaven.
    -2 the mountain Meru.
    -3 a god. ˚आहारः 'the food of the gods', nectar. ˚इन्द्रः
    1 Indra.
    -2 Śiva.
    -3 Brahman. ˚गुरुः an epithet of Bṛihaspati, ˚गोपः a kind of insect; (cf. इन्द्रगोप) श्रद्दधे त्रिदशगोपमात्रके दाहशक्तिमिव कृष्णवर्त्मनि R.11.42. ˚दीर्घिका an epithet of the Ganges. ˚पतिः Indra; एषो$प्यैरावतस्थस्त्रिदशपतिः Ratn.4.11. ˚पुङ्गवः Viṣṇu; Rām.1. ˚मञ्जरी the holy basil. ˚वधू, ˚वनिता, an Apsaras or heavenly damsel; कैलासस्य त्रिदशवनितादर्पणस्यातिथिः स्याः Me.6. ˚वर्त्मन् the sky. ˚श्रेष्ठः
    1 Agni.
    -2 Brahman. ˚दशीभूत Become divine; त्रिदशीभूतपौराणां स्वर्गान्तरमकल्पयत् R.15.12.
    -दिनम् three days collectively. ˚स्पृश् m. concurrence of three lunations with one solar day.
    -दिवम् 1 the heaven; त्रिमार्गयेव त्रिदिवस्य मार्गः Ku.1.28; Ś.7.3.
    -2 sky, atmosphere.
    -3 paradise.
    -4 happi- ness. (
    -वा) cardamoms. ˚अधीशः, ˚ईशः
    1 an epithet of Indra.
    -2 a god. ˚आलयः the heaven; अश्वमेधजिताँल्लोका- नाप्नोति त्रिदिवालये Mb.13.141.53. ˚उद्भवा
    1 the Ganges.
    -2 small cardamoms. ˚ओकस् m. a god; वपुषि त्रिदिवौकसां परं सह पुष्पैरपतत्र्छिलीमुखाः Vikr.15.72. ˚गत dead; त्रिदिवगतः किमु वक्ष्यते पिता मे Vikr.6.62.
    -दृश् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -दोषम् vitiation or derangement of the three humours of the body, i. e. वात, पित्त and कफ.
    -धा ind. in 3 parts, ways or places; triply, ˚त्वम् tripartition; Ch. Up.
    -धातुः an epithet of Gaṇeśa;
    -तुम् 1 the triple world.
    -2 the aggregate of the 3 minerals or humours.
    -धामन् m.
    1 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -2 of Vyāsa;
    -3 of Śiva.
    -4 of Agni.
    -5 death. -n. the heaven; हंसो हंसेन यानेन त्रिधाम परमं ययौ Bhāg.3.24.2.
    -धारा the Ganges.
    -नयन, -नेत्रः, -लोचनः epithets of Śiva; R.3. 66; Ku.3.66;5.72.
    - नवत a. ninety-third.
    -नवतिः f. ninety three.
    -नयना Pārvat&imacr.
    -नाभः Viṣṇu; Bhāg.8. 17.26.
    -नेत्रचूडामणिः the moon.
    -नेत्रफलः the cocoa-nut tree.
    -पञ्च a. three-fold five, i. e. fifteen.
    -पञ्चाश a. fiftythird.
    -पञ्चाशत् f. fifty-three.
    -पुटः glass (काच).
    -पताकः 1 the hand with three fingers stretched out or erect.
    -2 the forehead marked naturally with three horizontal lines.
    -पत्रकः the Palāśa tree.
    -पथम् 1 the three paths taken collectively, i. e. the sky, atmosphere, and the earth, or the sky, earth and the lower world.
    -2 a place where three roads meet. (
    -था) an epithet of Mathura. ˚गा, ˚गामिनी an epithet of the Ganges; गङ्गा त्रिपथगामिनी; धृतसत्पथस्त्रिपथगामभितः स तमारुरोह पुरुहूतसुतः Ki.6.1; Amaru.99.
    -पद्, -पाद्, -पात् m. Ved.
    1 Viṣṇu.
    -2 fever (personified).
    -पद a. three-footed. (
    -दम्) a tripod; त्रिपदैः करकैः स्थालैः...... Śiva. B.22. 62.
    -पदिका 1 a tripod.
    -2 a stand with three feet.
    -पदी 1 the girth of an elephant; नास्रसत्करिणां ग्रैवं त्रिपदी- च्छेदिनामपि R.4.48.
    -2 the Gāyatrī metre.
    -3 a tripod.
    -4 the plant गोधापदी.
    -परिक्रान्त a. one who walks thrice round a sacred fire.
    -पर्णः Kiṁśuka tree.
    -पाटः 1 intersection of a prolonged side and perpendicular (in a quadrangular figure).
    -2 the figure formed by such intersection.
    -पाटिका a beak.
    पाठिन् a.
    1 familiar with Saṁhitā, Pada, and Krama.
    -2 one who learns a thing after three repetitions.
    -पादः 1 the Supreme Being.
    -2 fever.
    -पाद् a.
    1 having three feet.
    -2 con- sisting of three parts, having three fourths; राघवः शिथिलं तस्थौ भुवि धर्मस्त्रिपादिव R.15.96.
    -3 trinomial. (-m.)
    1 an epithet of Viṣṇu in his dwarf incarnation.
    -2 the Supreme Being.
    -पिटकम् the 3 collections of Buddhistic sacred writings (सुत्त, विनय and अभिधम्म).
    -पुट a. triangular.
    (-टः) 1 an arrow.
    -2 the palm of the hand.
    -3 a cubit.
    -4 a bank or shore.
    -पुटकः a triangle.
    -पुटा an epithet of Durgā.
    -पुटिन् m. the castor-oil plant.
    -पुण्ड्रम्, -पुण्ड्रक a mark on the forehead consisting of three lines made with cowdung ashes.
    -पुरम् 1 a collection of three cities.
    -2 the three cities of gold, silver, and iron in the sky, air and earth built for demons by Maya; (these cities were burnt down, along the demons inhabiting them, by Śiva at the request of the gods); Ku.7.48; Amaru.2; संरक्ताभिस्त्रिपुरविजयो गीयते किन्नरीभिः Me.56; Bh.3.123; (
    -रः) N. of a demon or demons presiding over these cities. ˚अधिपतिः N. of Maya, ˚अन्तकः, ˚अरिः, ˚घ्नः, ˚दहनः, ˚द्विष् m., हरः &c. epithets of Śiva; अये गौरीनाथ त्रिपुरहर शम्भो त्रिनयन Bh.3.123; R.17.14. ˚दाहः burning of the three cities; मुहुरनुस्मरयन्तमनुक्षपं त्रिपुरदाहमुमापतिसेविनः Ki.5.14. ˚सुन्दरी Durgā.
    (-री) 1 N. of a place near Jabalpura, formerly capital of the kings of Chedi.
    -2 N. of a country.
    -पुरुष a
    1 having the length of three men.
    -2 having three assistants. (
    -षम्) the three ancestors- father, grand-father and great-grand-father.
    -पृष्ठम् the highest heaven; Bhāg.1.19.23. (
    ष्ठः) Viṣṇu.
    -पौरुष a.
    1 belonging to, or extending over, three generations of men.
    2 offered to three (as oblations).
    -3 inherited from three (as an estate).
    -प्रस्रुतः an elephant in rut.
    -फला (1) the three myrobalans taken collectively, namely, Terminalia Chebula, T. Bellerica, and Phyllanthus (Mar. हिरडा, बेहडा and आंवळकाठी). Also (2) the three sweet fruits (grape, pomegranate, and date); (3) the three fragrant fruits (nutmeg, areca- nut, and cloves).
    -बन्धनः the individual soul.
    -बलिः, बली, -वलिः, -वली f.
    1 the three folds or wrinkles of skin above the navel of a woman (regarded as a mark of beauty); क्षामोदरोपरिलसत्त्रिवलीलतानाम् Bh.1.93,81; cf. Ku.1.39.
    -2 the anus.
    -बलीकम् the anus.
    -बाहुः a kind of fighting with swords.
    -ब्रह्मन् a. with ब्रह्मा, विष्णु and महेश.
    -भम् three signs of the zodiac, or ninety degrees.
    -भङ्गम् a pose in which the image is bent at three parts of the body.
    -भद्रम् copulation, sexual union, cohabitation.
    -भागः 1 the third part; त्रिभागं ब्रह्महत्यायाः कन्या प्राप्नोति दुष्यती Mb.12.165.42.
    -2 the third part of a sign of the zodiac.
    -भुक्ल a. one possessed of learning, good conduct and good family-descent (Dānasāgara, Bibliotheca Indica,274, Fasc.1, p.29).
    -भुजम् a triangle.
    -भुवनम् the three worlds; पुण्यं यायास्त्रिभुवन- गुरोर्धाम चण्डीश्वरस्य Me.35; Bh.1.99. ˚गुरु Śiva. ˚कीर्तिरसः a patent medicine in Āyurveda. ˚पतिः Viṣṇu.
    -भूमः a palace with three floors.
    -मद the three narcotic plants; the three-fold haughtiness; Bhāg.3.1.43.
    -मधु n.
    -मधुरम् 1 sugar, honey, and ghee.
    -2 three verses of the Ṛigveda (1.9.6-8; मधु वाता ऋतायते˚).
    -3 a ceremony based on the same; L. D. B.
    -4 threefold utterance of a vedic stanza ˚मधु वाता -m. a reciter and performer of the above ceremony; L. D. B.
    -मार्गा the Ganges; त्रिमार्गयेव त्रिदिवस्य मार्गः Ku.1.28.
    -मुकुटः the Trikūṭa mountain.
    -मुखः an epithet of Buddha.
    -मुनि ind. having the three sages पाणिनि, कात्यायन and पतञ्जलि; त्रिमुनि व्याकरणम्.
    -मूर्तिः 1 the united form of Brahmā, Viṣṇu, and Maheśa, the Hindu triad; नमस्त्रिमूर्तये तुभ्यं प्रांक्सृष्टेः केवलात्मने । गुणत्रयविभायाय पश्चाद्भेदमुपेयुषे ॥ Ku.2.4.
    -2 Buddha, or Jina.
    -मूर्धन् m.
    1 a demon; त्रयश्च दूषण- खरस्त्रिमूर्धानो रणे हताः U.2.15.
    -2 a world called महर्लोक; G&imac;rvāṇa; cf. अमृतं क्षेममभयं त्रिमूर्ध्नो$धायि मूर्धसु Bhāg.2.6.19.
    -यव a. weighing 3 barley corns; Ms.8.134.
    -यष्टिः a necklace of three strings.
    -यामकम् sin.
    -यामा 1 night (consisting of 3 watches of praharas, the first and last half prahara being excluded); संक्षिप्येत क्षण इव कथं दीर्घयामा त्रियामा Me.11, Ku.7.21,26; R.9.7; V.3. 22.
    -2 turmeric.
    -3 the Indigo plant.
    -4 the river Yamuṇā.
    -युगः an epithet of Viṣṇu; धर्मं महापुरुष पासि युगानुवृत्तं छन्नः कलौ यदभवस्त्रियुगो$थ सत्त्वम् Bhāg.7.9.38; the god in the form of यज्ञपुरुष; Bhāg.5.18.35.
    -योनिः a law-suit (in which a person engages from anger, cove- tousness, or infatuation).
    -रसकम् spirituous liquor; see त्रिसरकम्.
    -रात्र a. lasting for three nights. (
    -त्रः) a festival lasting for three nights. (
    -त्रम्) a period of three nights.
    -रेखः a conch-shell.
    -लिङ्ग a. having three genders, i. e. an adjective.
    -2 possessing the three Guṇas. (
    -गाः) the country called Telaṅga. (
    -गी) the three genders taken collectively.
    -लोकम् the three worlds. (
    -कः) an inhabitant of the three worlds; यद्धर्मसूनोर्बत राजसूये निरीक्ष्य दृक्स्वस्त्ययनं त्रिलोकः Bhāg.3. 2.13. ˚आत्मन् m. the Supreme Being. ˚ईशः the sun. ˚नाथः 'lord of the three worlds', an epithet of
    1 Indra; त्रिलोकनाथेन सदा मखद्विषस्त्वया नियम्या ननु दिव्यचक्षुषा R.3.45.
    -2 of Śiva; Ku.5.77. ˚रक्षिन् a. protecting the 3 worlds; त्रिलोकरक्षी महिमा हि वज्रिणः V.1.6.
    -लोकी the three worlds taken collectively, the universe; सत्यामेव त्रिलोकीसरिति हरशिरश्चुम्बिनीविच्छटायाम् Bh.3.95; Śānti.4.22.
    -लोचनः Śiva.
    (-ना) 1 an unchaste woman.
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -लोहकम् the three metals:-- gold, silver, and copper.
    -वर्गः 1 the three objects of wordly existence, i. e. धर्म, अर्थ, and काम; अनेन धर्मः सविशेषमद्य मे त्रिवर्गसारः प्रतिभाति भाविनि Ku.5.38; अन्योन्यानुबन्धम् (त्रिवर्गम्) Kau. A.1.7; प्राप त्रिवर्गं बुबुधे$त्रिवर्गम् (मोक्षम्) Bu. Ch.2.41.
    -2 the three states of loss, stability, and increase; क्षयः स्थानं च वृद्धिश्च त्रिवर्गो नीतिवेदिनाम् Ak.
    -3 the three qualities of nature, i. e. सत्त्व, रजस्, and तमस्.
    -4 the three higher castes.
    -5 the three myrobalans.
    -6 propriety, decorum.
    -वर्णकम् the first three of the four castes of Hindus taken collectively.
    -वर्ष a. three years old; Ms.5.7.
    -वलिः, -ली f. (in comp.) three folds over a woman's navel (regarded as a mark of beauty)
    -वली the anus.
    -वारम् ind. three times, thrice.
    -विक्रमः Viṣṇu in his fifth or dwarf incarnation. ˚रसः a patent medicine in Āyurveda.
    -विद्यः a Brāhmaṇa versed in the three Vedas.
    -विध a. of three kinds, three-fold.
    -विष्टपम्, -पिष्टपम् 1 the world of Indra, heaven; त्रिविष्टपस्येव पतिं जयन्तः R.6.78.
    -2 the three worlds. ˚सद् m. a god.
    -वृत् a.
    1 threefold; मौञ्जी त्रिवृत्समा श्लक्ष्णा कार्या विप्रस्य मेखला Ms.2.42.
    -2 consisting of three parts (as three गुणs, विद्याs); Bhāg.3.24.33;1.23.39; (consisting of three letters- ओङ्कार); हिरण्यगर्भो वेदानां मन्त्राणां प्रणवस्त्रिवृत् Bhāg.11.16.12. (-m.)
    1 a sacrifice.
    -2 a girdle of three strings; Mb.12.47.44.
    -3 an amulet of three strings. (-f.) a plant possessing valuable purgative properties. ˚करण combining three things, i. e. earth, water, and fire.
    -वृत्तिः livelihood through 3 things (sacrifice, study and alms).
    -वेणिः, -णी f. the place near Prayāga where the Ganges joins the Yamunā and receives under ground the Sarasvatī; the place called दक्षिणप्रयाग where the three sacred rivers separate.
    -वेणुः 1 The staff (त्रिदण्ड) of a Saṁnyāsin; केचित् त्रिवेणुं जगृहुरेके पात्रं कमण्डलुम् Bhāg.11.23.34.
    -2 The pole of a chariot; अथ त्रिवेणुसंपन्नं...... बभञ्ज च महारथम् Rām.3. 51.16; Mb.7.156.83; a three bannered (chariot); Bhāg.4.26.1.
    -वेदः a Brāhmaṇa versed in the three Vedas.
    -शक्तिः a deity (त्रिकला), Māyā; Bhāg.2.6.31.
    -शङ्कुः 1 N. of a celebrated king of the Solar race, king of Ayodhyā and father of Hariśchandra. [He was a wise, pious, and just king, but his chief fault was that he loved his person to an inordinate degree. Desiring to celebrate a sacrifice by virtue of which he could go up to heaven in his mortal body, he requested his family-priest Vasiṣṭha to officiate for him; but being refused he next requested his hundred sons who also rejected his absurd proposal. He, therefore, called them cowardly and impotent, and was, in return for these insults, cursed and degraded by them to be a Chāṇḍāla. While he was in this wretched condition, Viśvāmitra, whose family Triśaṅku had in times of famine laid under deep obligations, undertook to celebrate the sacrifice, and invited all the gods to be present. They, however, declined; whereupon the enraged Viśvāmitra. by his own power lifted up Triśaṅku to the skies with his cherished mortal body. He began to soar higher and higher till his head struck against the vault of the heaven, when he was hurled down head-foremost by Indra and the other gods. The mighty Viśvāmitra, however, arrested him in his downward course, saying 'Stay Triśaṅku', and the unfortunate monarch remained suspended with his head towards the earth as a constellation in the southern hemisphere. Hence the wellknown proverb:-- त्रिशङ्कुरिवान्तरा तिष्ठ Ś.2.]
    -2 the Chātaka bird.
    -3 a cat.
    -4 a grass-hopper.
    -5 a fire- fly. ˚जः an epithet of Hariśchandra. ˚याजिन् m. an epithet of Viśvāmitra.
    -शत a. three hundred.
    (-तम्) 1 one hundred and three.
    -2 three hundred.
    -शरणः a Buddha.
    -शर्करा three kinds of sugar (गुडोत्पन्ना, हिमोत्था, and मधुरा).
    -शाख a. three-wrinkled; भ्रुकुट्या भीषणमुखः प्रकृत्यैव त्रिशाखया Ks.12.72.
    -शालम् a house with three halls or chambers.
    -शिखम् 1 a trident; तदापतद्वै त्रिशिखं गरुत्मते Bhāg.1.59.9.
    -2 a crown or crest (with three points).
    -शिरस् m.
    1 N. of a demon killed by Rāma.
    -2 an epithet of Kubera.
    -3 fever. त्रिशिरस्ते प्रसन्नो$स्मि व्येतु ते मज्ज्वराद्भयम् Bhāg.1.63.29.
    -शीर्षः Śiva.
    -शीर्षकम्, -शूलम् a trident. ˚अङ्कः, ˚धारिन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -शुक्लम् the holy combination of 'three days' viz. Uttarāyaṇa (day of the gods), the bright half of the moon (day of the manes) and day- time; त्रिशुक्ले मरणं यस्य, L. D. B.
    -शूलिन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -शृङ्गः 1 the Trikūṭa mountain.
    -2 a triangle.
    -शोकः the soul.
    -षष्टिः f. sixty-three.
    -ष्टुभ् f. a metre of 4 x 11 syllables.
    -संध्यम्, -संध्यी the three periods of the day, i. e. dawn, noon, and sunset; also
    -त्रिसवनम् (
    -षवणम्); Ms.11.216.
    -संध्यम् ind. at the time of the three Sandhyas; सान्निध्यं पुष्करे येषां त्रिसन्ध्यं कुरुनन्दन Mb.
    -सप्तत a. seventy-third.
    -सप्ततिः f. seventy-three.
    -सप्तन्, -सप्त a. (pl.) three times 7, i. e. 21.
    -सम a. (in geom.) having three equal sides, equilateral.
    -सरः milk, sesamum and rice boiled together.
    -सरकम् drinking wine thrice ('सरकं शीधुपात्रे स्यात् शीधुपाने च शीधुनि' इति विश्वः); प्रातिभं त्रिसरकेण गतानाम् Śi.1.12.
    -सर्गः the creation of the 3 Guṇas; Bhāg.1.1.1.
    -साधन a. having a threefold causality; R.3.13.
    -सामन् a. singing 3 Sāmans (an उद्गातृ); उद्गाता तत्र संग्रामे त्रिसामा दुन्दुभिर्नृप Mb.12.98.27.
    -साम्यम् an equilibrium of the three (qualities); Bhāg.2.7.4.
    -सुपर्णः, -र्णम् 1 N. of the three Ṛigvedic verses (Rv.1.114.3-5).
    -2 N. of T. Ār.1.48-5; -a. familiar with or reciting these verses; Ms.3.185.
    -स्थली the three sacred places: काशी, प्रयाग, and गया.
    -स्थानम् the head, neck and chest to- gether; तन्त्रीलयसमायुक्तं त्रिस्थानकरणान्वितम् Rām.7.71.15. -a.
    1 having 3 dwelling places.
    -2 extending through the 3 worlds.
    -स्रोतस् f. an epithet of the Ganges; त्रिस्रोतसं वहति यो गगनप्रतिष्ठाम् Ś.7.6; R.1.63; Ku.7.15.
    -सीत्य, -हल्य a. ploughed thrice (as a field).
    -हायण a. three years old.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > त्रि _tri

  • 89 देव _dēva

    देव a. (
    -वी f.) [दिव्-अच्]
    1 Divine, celestial; Bg.11. 11; Ms.12.117.
    -2 Shining; यज्ञस्य देवमृत्विजम् Rv.1.1.1.
    -3 Fit to be worshipped or honoured.
    -वः 1 A god, deity; एको देवः केशवो वा शिवो वा Bh.3.12.
    -2 (a) The god of rain, an epithet of Indra; as in द्वादश वर्षाणि देवो न ववर्ष; अवर्षयद्देवः Rām.1.9.18; काले च देशे च प्रववर्ष देवः Bu. Ch.2.7. (b) A cloud.
    -3 A divine man, Brāhmaṇa, as in भूदेव.
    -4 A king, ruler, as in मनुष्यदेव; तां देवसमितिं (अभ्या- गच्छत्) Mb.3.13.22.
    -5 A title affixed to the names of Bārhmaṇas; as in गोविन्ददेव, पुरुषोत्तमदेव &c.
    -6 (In dramas) A title of honour used in addressing a king, ('My lord', 'Your majesty'); ततश्च देव Ve.4; यथाज्ञापयति देवः &c.
    -7 Quicksilver.
    -8 The Supreme Spirit; हित्वा च देहं प्रविशन्ति देवं दिवौकसो द्यामिव पार्थ सांख्याः Mb.12.31.112.
    -9 A fool
    -1 A child.
    -11 A man following any particular business.
    -12 A lover.
    -13 Emulation.
    -14 Sport, play.
    -15 A husband's brother (cf. देवृ, देवर).
    -16 A lancer.
    -वम् An organ of sense; देवानां प्रभवो देवो मनसश्च त्रिलोककृत् Mb.14.41.3. [cf. L. deus; Gr. deos.].
    -Comp. -अंशः a partial incarnation of god.
    -अगारः, -रम् a temple.
    -अङ्गना a celestial damsel, an apsaras.
    -अतिदेवः, -अधिदेवः 1 the highest god.
    -2 an epithet of (1) Śiva. (2) Buddha. (3) Viṣṇu. देवातिदेवो भगवान् प्रसूतिरंशे हरिर्यस्य जगत्प्रणेता Hariv.
    -अधिपः 1 an epithet of Indra.
    -2 the supreme god.
    -अनीकम् an army of celestials.
    -अनुचरः, -अनुयायिन् m. an attendant or follower of a god; निशम्य देवानुचरस्य वाचं मनुष्यदेवः पुनरप्युवाच R.2.52.
    -अन्धस् n.,
    अन्नम् 1 the food of gods, divine food, ambrosia.
    -2 food that has been first offered to an idol; see Ms.5.7 and Kull. thereon.
    -अभीष्ट a.
    1 liked by or dear to gods.
    -2 sacred or dedicated to a deity. (
    -ष्टा) piper betel.
    -अरण्यम् the garden of gods, the Nandana gar- den; अलमुद्द्योतयामासुर्देवारण्यमिवर्तवः R.1.8.
    -अरिः a demon.
    -अर्चनम्, -ना 1 the worship of gods.
    -2 idolatry.
    -अर्पणम् 1 an offering to the god.
    -2 the Veda; पृथग्- भूतानि चान्यानि यानि देवार्पणानि च Mb.13.86.17 (see com.).
    -आवसथः a temple.
    -अश्वः an epithet of उच्चैःश्रवस्, the horse of Indra.
    -आक्रीडः 'the garden of the gods', Nandana garden.
    -आजीवः, -आजीविन् m. an attendant upon an idol.
    -2 a low Brāhmaṇa subsisting by attendance upon an idol and upon the offerings made to it.
    -आत्मन् a.
    1 consecrated, holy, sacred.
    -2 of a divine nature. (-m.)
    1 the divine soul; ते ध्यानयोगानुगता$ पश्यन् देवात्मशक्तिं स्वगुणैर्निगूढाम् Śvet. Up.1.3.
    -2 the holy fig-tree.
    -आयतनम् a temple; Ms.4.46; न देवा- यतनं गच्छेत् कदाचिद् वा$प्रदक्षिणम् । न पीडयेद् वा वस्त्राणि न देवा- यतनेष्वपि ॥ Kūrma P.
    -आयुधम् 1 a divine weapon.
    -2 rainbow.
    -आयुष्म् the life-time of a god.
    -आलयः 1 heaven.
    -2 a temple.
    -आवासः 1 heaven.
    -2 the holy fig-tree (अश्वत्थ).
    -3 a temple.
    -4 the Sumeru mountain.
    -आहारः nectar, ambrosia.
    -इज् a. (nom. sing. देवेट्-ड्) worshipping the gods.
    -इज्यः an epithet of Bṛihaspati, preceptor of the gods.
    -इज्जः 1 an epithet of Indra.
    -2 of Śiva.
    -इष्ट a. dear to gods. (
    -ष्टः) bdellium. (
    -ष्टा) the wild lime tree.
    -ईशः an epithet of (1) Indra. (2) Śiva. (3) Viṣṇu. (4) Brahman. (
    -शी) N. of Durgā also of Devakī mother of Kṛiṣṇa.
    -ईश्वरः N. of (1) Śiva. (2) Indra.
    -उद्यानम् 1 divine garden.
    -2 The Nandana garden.
    -3 a garden near a temple.
    -ऋषिः (देवर्षिः)
    1 a deified saint, divine sage such as अत्रि, भृगु, पुलस्त्य, अङ्गिरस् &c.; एवंवादिनि देवर्षौ Ku.6.84 (i. e. अङ्गिरस्); अथ देवऋषी राजन् संपरेतं नृपात्मजम् Bhāg.; आब्रह्मभुवनाल्लोका देवर्षिपितृमानवाः । तृप्यन्तु पितरः सर्वे मातृमातामहा- दयाः Tarpaṇamantra.
    -2 an epithet of Narada; देवर्षीणां च नारदः Bg.1.13.26.
    -ओकस् n. the mountain Meru or Sumeru.
    -कन्या a celestial damsel, a nymph; also देवकन्यका.
    -कर्दमाः sandal, aloe wood, camphor, saffron pounded together and made into a paste.
    -कर्मन् n.,
    -कार्यम् 1 a religious act or rite, divine command; अनुष्ठितदेवकार्यम् R.12.13.
    -2 the worship of gods.
    -काष्ठम् the Devadāru tree.
    -किरी N. of a Rāgiṇī; ललिता मालती गौरी नाटी देवकिरी तथा । मेघरागस्य रागिण्यो भवन्तीमाः सुमध्यमाः ॥
    -कुटम् a temple.
    -कुण़्डम् a natural spring.
    -कुलम् 1 a temple.
    -2 a race of gods.
    -3 a group of gods.
    -कुल्या the celestial Ganges.
    -कुसुमम् cloves; एलां च देवकुसुमं त्वक्पत्रं देवदारु च Śiva. B.3.14.
    -खातम्, -खातकम् 1 a natural hollow among moun- tains.
    -2 a natural pond or reservoir; Ms.4.23.
    -3 a pond near a temple. ˚बिल a cavern, chasm.
    -गणः a class of gods.
    -गणिका an apsaras; q. v.
    -गतिः the path of देवलोक; अनुज्ञातश्च रामेण ययौ देवगतिं मुनिः A. Rām. 2.1.4.
    -गन्धर्वः an epithet of Nārada. (
    -र्वम्) a particular mode of singing.
    -गर्जनम् thunder.
    -गर्भः see हिरण्यगर्भ; Rām.2.4.23.
    -गायनः a celestial choris- ter, a Gandharva.
    -गान्धारी N. of a Rāgiṇī गान्धारी देवगान्धारी मालवी श्रीश्च सारवी । रामकीर्यपि रागिण्यः श्रीरागस्य प्रिया इमाः ॥
    -गिरिः 1 N. of a mountain; cf. Me.44.
    -2 N. of a town (Daulatabad).
    -गिरी f. N. of a Rāgiṇī.
    -गुरुः 1 an epithet of Kaśyapa (the father of gods).
    -2 of Bṛihaspati (the preceptor of gods).
    -गुही an epithet of Sarasvatī or of a place situated on it.
    -गुह्यम् 1 a secret only known by gods.
    -2 death.
    -गृहम् 1 a temple.
    -2 the place of a king.
    -3 a planetary sphere.
    -ग्रहः a class of demons who causes harmless madness.
    -चरितम् the course of action or practices of the gods; न देवचरितं चरेत्.
    -चर्या the worship or service of gods.
    -चिकित्सकौ (du.) Aśvins, the twin physicians of gods.
    -छन्दः a pearl-necklace having 81, 1 or 18 strings; शतमष्टयुतं हारो देवच्छन्दो ह्यशीतिरेकयुता Bṛi. S.81.32.
    -जनः the gods collectively. ˚विद्या the science of music, dance, other arts &c.; Ch. Up.7.1.2.
    -जातम् a class of gods.
    -जामिः f. a sister of the gods; देवजामीनां पुत्रो$सि Av. 6.46.1.
    -तरुः 1 the holy fig-tree.
    -2 one of the trees of paradise. (i. e. मन्दार, पारिजात, सन्तान, कल्प and हरि- चन्दन); पञ्चैते देवतरवो मन्दारः पारिजातकः । सन्तानः कल्पवृक्षश्च पुंसि वा हरिचन्दनम् ॥ Ak.
    -3 the tree in a village (चैत्यवृक्ष) where the villagers usually meet (Mar. पार).
    -तर्पणम् offerings of water, part of the सन्ध्या ceremony.
    -ताडः 1 fire.
    -2 an epithet of Rāhu.
    -तातः 1 a sacrifice.
    -2 N. of Kaśyapa.
    -तातिः 1 a god.
    -2 divine service; स नो यक्षद् देवताता यजीयान् Rv.3.19.1.
    -तीर्थम् 1 the right moment for the worship of gods.
    -2 the tips of the fingers sacred to gods.
    -दत्त a.
    1 god-given, grant- ed by the gods.
    -2 given to the gods (as a village, &c.).
    (-त्तः) 1 N. of the conch-shell of Arjuna; देवदत्तं धनञ्जयः (दध्मौ) Bg.1.15.
    -2 a certain person (used in speaking of men indefinitely); मुक्तस्ततो यदि बन्धाद्देवदत्त उपाच्छिनत्ति Bhāg.5.14.24; देवदत्तः पचति, पिनो देवदत्तो दिवा न भुङ्क्ते &c.
    -3 one of the vital airs exhaled in yawning; देवदत्तो विजृम्भणे. ˚अग्रजः N. of Buddha.
    -दर्शन a. visiting the gods. (
    -नः) N. of Nārada; यथा प्राह नारदो देवदर्शनः Bhāg.2.8.1.
    -दारु m., n. a species of pine; गङ्गाप्रवाहोक्षित- देवदारु Ku.1.54; R.2.36.
    -दासः a servant or attendant upon a temple.
    (-सी) 1 a female in the service of gods or a temple.
    -2 a courtezan (employed as a dancer in a temple).
    -3 the wild citron tree.
    -दीपः the eye.
    -दुन्दुभिः 1 divine drum; देवदुन्दुभिनिर्घोषो पुष्पवृष्टिश्च खात् पतन् Rām.
    -2 the holy basil with red flowers.
    -3 an epi- thet of Indra.
    -दूतः a divine envoy or messenger, an angel.
    -देवः 1 an epithet of Brahman; Rām.1.43.1.
    -2 of Śiva; अयाचितारं न हि देवदेवमद्रिः सुतां ग्राहयितुं शशाक Ku.1.52.
    -3 of Viṣṇu; Bg.1.15.
    -4 of Gaṇeśa; दृष्टप्रभावो वरदो देवदेवो विनायकः Ks.2.55.
    -दैवत्य a. destined for the god; Ms.2.189.
    -द्रोणी a procession with idols.
    -धर्मः a religious duty or office.
    -धानी the city of Indra; तां देवधानीं स वरुथिनीपतिर्बहिः समन्ताद्रुरुधे पृतन्यया Bhāg. 8.15.23.
    -धान्यम् a kind of grass-grain (Mar. देवभात).
    -धिष्ण्यम् a chariot of the gods (विमान); Bhāg.1. 82.7.
    -नक्षत्रम् N. of the first 14 नक्षत्रs in the southern quarter (opp. to यमनक्षत्रम्).
    -नदी 1 the Ganges.
    -2 any holy river; Ms.2.17.
    -नन्दिन् m. N. of the door- keeper of Indra.
    -2 N. of a grammarian.
    -नागरी N. of the character in which Sanskrit is usually written.
    -नाथः Śiva.
    -निकायः 1 'residence of gods', paradise, heaven; तं तुष्टुवुर्देवनिकायकेतवः Bhāg.1.27.25.
    -2 a host or assembly of gods; Ms.1.36.
    -निन्दकः a blasphe- mer, unbeliever, heretic, atheist.
    -निन्दा heresy, athe- ism.
    -निर्माल्यम् 1 a garland remaining from a sacrifice.
    -निर्मित a. 'god-created', natural.
    -पतिः an epithet of Indra.
    -पादाः 'the royal feet or presence', an honorific term for a king; देवपादाः प्रमाणम्.
    -पथः 1 'heavenly passage', heaven, firmament दिव्यो देवपथो ह्येष नात्र गच्छन्ति मानुषाः Mb.
    -2 the milky way.
    -पशुः any animal con- secrated to a deity.
    -पात्रम् an epithet of Agni.
    -पुर्, -पुरी f. an epithet of Amarāvatī, the city of Indra.
    -पुरोहितः 1 a domestic priest of the gods.
    -2 the planet Jupiter (बृहस्पति).
    -पुष्पम् cloves.
    -पूज्यः an epithet of Bṛihaspati.
    -प्रतिकृतिः f.,
    -प्रतिमा an idol, the image of a deity.
    -प्रश्नः 'consulting deities', astrology, for- tune-telling.
    -प्रसूत a. good-produced (water); Av.6. 1.2.
    -प्रियः 'dear to the gods', an epithet of Śiva; (देवानांप्रियः an irreg. comp. meaning-
    1 a goat.
    -2 a fool, idiot like a brute breast, as in ते$प्यतात्पर्यज्ञा देवानांप्रियाः K. P.
    -3 an ascetic, who renounces the world).
    -बलिः an oblation to the gods.
    -बाहुः 1 N. of a king in the Yadu race.
    -2 N. of a sage; देवबाहुः शतधनुः कृतवर्मेति तत्सुताः Bhāg.
    -ब्रह्मन् m. an epithet of Nārada.
    -ब्राह्मणः 1 a Brāhmaṇa who lives on the proceeds of a temple.
    -2 a venerable Brāhmaṇa.
    -भक्तिः worship or service of the gods.
    -भवनम् 1 the heaven.
    -2> a temple.
    -3 the holy fig-tree.
    -भागः the northern hemisphere.
    -भ m. a god; (-f.) heaven.
    -भूमिः f. heaven; पितुः प्रदेशा- स्तव देवभूमयः Ku.5.45.
    -भूतिः f. an epithet of the Ganges.
    -भूयम् divinity, godhead; विदितमेव भवतां...... परां निर्वृतिमुपेत्य देवभूयं गताः सर्वे न पूर्वपुरुषा इति Rām. Champū.
    -भृत् m. an epithet of
    1 Viṣṇu.
    -2 of Indra.
    -भोगः Pleasure of the gods, heavenly joy; अन्नन्ति दिव्यान् दिवि देवभोगान् Bg.9.2.
    -भोज्यम् nectar.
    -मणिः 1 the jewel of Viṣṇu called कौस्तुभ.
    -2 the sun.
    -3 a curl of hair on a horse's neck; आवर्तिनः शुभफल- प्रदशुक्तियुक्ताः संपन्नदेवमणयो भृतरन्ध्रभागाः (अश्वाः) Śi.5.4; N.1.58.
    -मधु n. divine honey; असौ वा आदित्यो देवमधु Ch. Up.3.1.1.
    -मातृ f. N. of Aditi, mother of gods.
    -मातृक a. 'having the god of rain or clouds as foster-mother', watered only by the clouds, depending on rain-water and not on irrigation, deprived of every other kind of water (as a country); देशो नद्यम्बुवृष्ट्यम्बु- संपन्नव्रीहिपालितः । स्यान्नदीमातृको देवमातृकश्च यथाक्रमम् ॥ Ak.; cf. also वितन्वति क्षेममदेवमातृकाः (i. e. नदीमातृकाः) चिराय तस्मिन् कुरवश्चकासते Ki.1. 17.
    -मानकः the jewel of Viṣṇu called कौस्तुभ.
    -माया the Māyā of gods; ते दुस्तराम- तितरन्ति च देवमायाम् Bhāg.
    -मार्गः the air or sky.
    -मासः the eighth month of pregnancy.
    -मुनिः a divine sage.
    -यजनम् 1 a sacrificial place, a place where a sacrifice is performed; ततस्ते देवयजनं ब्राह्मणाः स्वर्णलाङ्गलैः (कृष्ट्वा) Bhāg.1.74.12. देवयजनसंभवे सीते U.4.
    -2 a place of worship; मण्डलं देवयजनं दीक्षासंस्कार आत्मनः Bhāg.12.11.17.
    -यजि a. making oblations to gods.
    -यज्ञः a sacrifice to the superior gods made by oblations to fire, or through fire to the gods; (one of the five daily sacri- fices of a Brāhmaṇa; see Ms.3.81,85 and पञ्चयज्ञ also).
    -यज्यम्, -यज्या a sacrifice.
    -यात्रा 'an idol- procession,' any sacred festival when the idols are carried in procession; केनापि देवयात्रागतेन सिद्धादेशेन साधुना मत्समक्षमादिष्टा M.5.12-13.
    -यान bestowing मोक्ष; यज्ञस्य देवयानस्य मेध्याय हविषे नृप Bhāg.8.8.2.
    -नः the path leading to मोक्ष; सत्येन पन्था विततो देवयानः Muṇḍ.3.1.6.
    -यानम् a celestial car.
    -युगम् 1 the first of the four ages of the world; also called कृतयुग, सनत्कुमारो भगवान् पुरा देवयुगे प्रभुः Rām.1.11.11.
    -2 an age of the gods comprising four ages of men.
    -योनिः 1 a super- human being, a demigod; विद्याधरो$प्सरोयक्षरक्षोगन्धर्वकिन्नराः । पिशाचो गुह्यकः सिद्धो भूतो$मी देवयोनयः ॥ Ak.
    -2 a being of divine origin.
    -3 fuel used in kindling fire (f. also).
    -योषा an apsaras.
    -रथः a car for carrying the image of god in procession.
    -थम् a day's journey for the sun's chariot.
    -रहस्यम् a divine mystery.
    -राज्, -राजः 1 an epithet of Indra; Rām.7.6.6.
    -2 a king.
    -3 N. of Buddha.
    -रातः 1 an epithet of Parīkṣit.
    -2 a kind of swan or crane.
    -राष्ट्रम् N. of an empire in the Deccan.
    -लक्ष्मम् the Brāhmanical cord.
    -लता the Navamallikā or double jasmine plant.
    -लिङ्गम् the image or statue of a deity; Bhāg.3.17.13.
    -लोकः heaven, paradise; देवलोकस्य चर्त्विजः (प्रभुः) Ms.4.182.
    -वक्त्रम् an epithet of fire.
    -वर्त्मन् n. the sky or atmosphere.
    -वर्धकिः, -शिल्पिन् m. Viśvakarman, the architect of gods.
    -वाणी 'divine voice', a voice from heaven.
    -वाहनः an epithet of Agni.
    -विद्या 1 divine science; Ch. Up.7.1.2.
    -2 the science of Nirukta or etymology; ibid.
    -विभागः the northern hemisphere.
    -विश् f.,
    -विशा a deity.
    -वीतिः food of the gods.
    -वृक्षः the Mandāra tree.
    -व्यचस् a. Ved. occupied by the gods.
    -व्रतम् 1 a religious observance, any religious vow.
    -2 the favourite food of the gods. (
    -तः) an epithet of
    1 Bhīṣma; ततो विनशनं प्रागाद्यत्र देवव्रतो$पतत् Bhāg.1.9.1.
    -2 Kārtikeya.
    -व्रतत्वम् celibacy (ब्रह्मचारिव्रत); देवव्रतत्वं विज्ञाप्य Mb.5.172.19.
    -शत्रुः a demon; स देवशत्रूनिव देवराजः Mb.
    -शुनी an epithet of Saramā, the bitch of the gods.
    -शेखर the damanaka tree (Mar. दवणा).
    -शेषम् the remnants of a sacrifice offered to gods.
    -श्रीः m. a sacrifice. (f.) Lakṣmī.
    -श्रुतः an epithet of
    1 Viṣṇu.
    -2 Nārada.
    -3 a sacred treatise.
    -4 a god in general.
    -संसद् f. देवसभा q. v.
    -सत्यम् divine truth, established order of the gods.
    -संध a. divine.
    -सभा 1 an assembly of the gods (सुधर्मन्).
    -2 a council of a king, council-chamber.
    -3 a gambling-house.
    -सभ्यः 1 a gambler.
    -2 a fre- quenter of gaming-houses.
    -3 an attendant on a deity.
    -4 the keeper of a gambling-house.
    -सहा 1 rules of begging alms (? भिक्षासूत्र); L. D. B.
    -2 N. of a plant.
    -सायुज्यम् identification or unification with a deity, conjunction with the gods, deification.
    -सिंह an epithet of Śiva.
    -सुषिः a tube or cavity (in the heart) leading to the gods; cf. उदान, तस्य ह वा एतस्य हृदयस्य पञ्च देवसुषयः Ch. Up.3.13.1.
    -सू N. of 8 deities (अग्नि, सोम, सवितृ, रुद्र, बृहस्पति, इन्द्र, मित्र and वरुण).
    -सृष्टा an intoxicating drink.
    -सेना 1 the army of gods.
    -2 N. of the wife of Skanda; स्कन्देन साक्षादिव देवसेनाम् R.7.1. (Malli.:-- देवसेना = स्कन्दपत्नी perhaps it merely means 'the army of the gods' personified as Skanda's wife). ˚पतिः, ˚प्रियः an epithet of Kārtikeya.
    -स्वम् 'property of gods', property applicable to religious purposes or endowments; यद्धनं यज्ञशीलानां देवस्वं तद्विदु- र्बुधाः Ms.11.2,26. ˚अपहरणम् sacrilege.
    -सावर्णिः the 13th Manu; मनुस्त्रयोदशो भाव्यो देवसावर्णिरात्मवान् Bhāg. 8.13.3.
    -हविस् n. an animal offered to gods at a sacrifice.
    -हिंसकः an enemy of gods.
    -हूः the left ear; Bhāg.4.25.51.
    -हूतिः f.
    1 invocation of the gods.
    -2 N. of a daughter of Manu Svāyambhuva and wife of Kardama.
    -हेडनम् an offence against the gods.
    -हेतिः a divine weapon.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > देव _dēva

  • 90 संज्ञा _sañjñā

    1
    संज्ञा 9 Ā.
    1 To know, understand, be aware of.
    -2 To recognize.
    -3 To live in harmony, agree together (with acc. or instr.); पित्रा पितरं वा संजानीते Sk.
    -4 To watch, be on the alert; संजानानान् परिहरन् रावणानुचरान् बहून् Bk.8.27.
    -5 To accede or agree to.
    -6 To re- member, think of (Paras); मातुः मातरं वा संजानाति Sk.
    -7 To direct, appoint. Caus.
    1 To inform.
    -2 To appease, gratify, console.
    -3 (a) To quiet, pacify (a sacrificial animal). (b) To kill.
    -4 To command, enjoin.
    -5 To animate.
    -6 To make intelligible, cause to be understood, inform.
    -7 To make a sign to (any one), communicate by signs.
    2
    संज्ञा 1 Consciousness, अकरुण पुनः संज्ञाव्याधिं विधाय किमीहसे Māl.9.42; रतिखेदसमुत्पन्ना निद्रा संज्ञाविपर्ययः Ku.6.44. संज्ञा लभ्, आपद् or प्रतिपद् 'to regain or recover one's con- sciousness, come to one's senses'.
    -2 Knowledge, under- standing; नायका मम सैन्यस्य संज्ञार्थं तान् व्रवीमि ते Bg.1.7; Mb.12.153.63.
    -3 Intellect, mind; लोकतन्त्रं हि संज्ञाश्च सर्वमन्ने प्रतिष्ठितम् Mb.13.63.5.
    -4 A hint, sign, token, gesture; मुखापिंतैकाङ्गुलिसंज्ञयैव मा चापलायेति गणान् व्यनैषीत् Ku.3.41; उपलभ्य ततश्च धर्मसंज्ञाम् Bu. Ch.5.21; Bhāg. 6.7.17.
    -5 A name, designation, an appellation; oft. at the end of comp. in this sense; द्वन्द्वैर्विमुक्ताः सुखदुःखसंज्ञैः Bg.15.5.
    -6 (In gram.) Any name or noun having a special meaning, a proper name.
    -7 The technical name for an affix.
    -8 The Gāyatrī Mantra; see गायत्री.
    -9 A track, footstep.
    -1 Direction.
    -11 A technical term.
    -12 N. of the daughter of Viśvakarman and wife of the sun, and mother of Yama, Yamī, and the two Aśvins. [A legend relates that संज्ञा on one occa- sion wished to go to her father's house and asked her husband's permission, which was not granted. Resol- ved to carry out her purpose, she created, by means of her superhuman power, a woman exactly like herself --who was, as it were, her own shadow (and was therefore called Chhāyā), --and putting her in her own place, went away without the knowledge of the sun. Chhāya bore to the sun three children (see छाया), and lived quite happily with him, so that when Saṁjñā returned, he would not admit her. Thus re- pudiated and disappointed, she assumed the form of a mare and roamed over the earth. The sun, how- ever, in course of time, came to know the real state of things, and discovered that his wife had assumed the form of a mare. He accordingly assumed the form of a horse, and was united with his wife, who bore to him, two sons--the Aśvinīkumāras or Aśvins q. v.]
    -Comp. -अधिकारः a leading rule which gives a parti- cular name to the rules falling under it, and which exercises influence over them.
    -विपर्ययः loss of conscious- ness; रतिखेदसमुत्पन्ना निद्रा संज्ञाविपर्ययः Ku.6.44.
    -विषयः an epithet, an attribute.
    -सुतः an epithet of Saturn.
    -सूत्रम् any Sūtra which teaches the meaning of a technical term.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > संज्ञा _sañjñā

  • 91 सु _su

    1
    सु I. 1 U. (सुवति-ते) To go, move. -II. 1, 2 P. (सवति, सौति) To possess power or supremacy. -III. 5. U. (सुनोति, सुनुते; सुत; the स् of सु is changed to ष् after any preposition ending in इ or उ)
    1 To press out or extract juice.
    -2 To distil.
    -3 To pour out, sprinkle, make a libation.
    -4 To perform a sacrifice especially the Soma (sacrifice).
    -5 To bathe.
    -6 To churn. -Desid. (सुषूषति-ते) -- With उद् to excite, agitate. -प्र to produce, beget.
    2
    सु ind. A particle often used with nouns to form Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhī compounds, and with adjectives and adverbs. It has the following senses:--
    1 Well, good, excellent; as in सुगन्धि.
    -2 Beautiful, handsome; as in सुमध्यमा, सुकेशी &c.
    -3 Well, perfectly, thoroughly, properly; सुजीर्णमन्नं सुविचक्षणः सुतः सुशासिता स्त्री नृपतिः सुसेवितः......सुदीर्घकाले$पि न याति विक्रियाम् H.1.22.
    -4 Easily, readily, as in सुकर or सुलभ q. v.
    -5 Much, very much, exceedingly; सुदारुण, सुदीर्घ &c.
    -6 Worthy of respect or reverence.
    -7 It is also said to have the senses of assent, prosperity, and distress.
    -Comp. -अक्ष a.
    1 having good eyes.
    -2 having keen organs, acute.
    -अङ्ग a. well-shaped, handsome, lovely.
    -अच्छ a. see s. v.
    -अन्त a. having happy end, ending well.
    -अल्प, -अल्पक a. see s. v.
    -अस्ति, -अस्तिक see s. v.
    -आकार, -आकृति a. well-formed, handsome, beautiful.
    - आगत see s. v.
    -आदानम् taking justly or properly; स्वादानाद्वर्णसंसर्गात्त्वबलानां च रक्षणात् । बलं संजायते राज्ञः स प्रेत्येह च वर्धते ॥ Ms.8.172.
    -आभास a. very splendid or illustrious; सारतो न विरोधी नः स्वाभासो भरवानुत Ki.15. 22.
    -इष्ट a. properly sacrificed; स्विष्टं यजुर्भिः प्रणतो$स्मि यज्ञम् Bhāg.4.7.41. ˚कृत् m. a form of fire; धर्मादिभ्यो यथान्यायं मन्त्रैः स्विष्टकृतं बुधः Bhāg.11.27.41.
    -उक्त a. well-spoken, well-said; अथवा सूक्तं खलु केनापि Ve.3. (
    -क्ता) a kind of bird (सारिका).
    (-क्तम्) 1 a good or wise saying; नेतुं वाञ्छति यः खलान् पथि सतां सूक्तैः सुधा- स्यन्दिभिः Bh.2.6; R.15.97.
    -2 a Vedic hymn, as in पुरुषसूक्त &c. ˚दर्शिन् m. a hymn-seer, Vedic sage. ˚वाकन्यायः A rule of interpretation according to which some thing that is declared as being subordinate to some- thing else should be understood to signify a part or whole on the basis of expediency or utility. This is discussed by जैमिनि and शबर at MS.3.2.15-18. ˚वाच् f.
    1 a hymn.
    -2 praise, a word of praise.
    -उक्तिः f.
    1 a good or friendly speech.
    -2 a good or clever saying.
    -3 a correct sentence.
    -उत्तर a.
    1 very superior.
    -2 well towards the north.
    -उत्थान a. making good efforts, vigorous, active. (
    -नम्) vigorous effort or exertion.
    -उन्मद, -उन्माद a. quite mad or frantic.
    - उपसदन a. easy to be approached.
    -उपस्कर a. furnished with good instruments.
    -कण्टका the aloe plant.
    -कण्ठ a. sweet- voiced. (
    -ण्ठी) the female cuckoo.
    -कण्डुः itch.
    -कन्दः 1 an onion.
    -2 a yam.
    -3 a sort of grass.
    -कन्दकः onion.
    -कर a. (
    -रा or
    -री f.)
    1 easy to be done, practi- cable, feasible; वक्तुं सुकरं कर्तुं (अध्यवसातुं) दुष्करम् Ve.3 'sooner said than done'.
    -2 easy to be managed. (
    -रः) a good-natured horse. (
    -रा) a tractable cow. (
    -रम्) charity, benevolence.
    -कर्मन् a.
    1 one whose deeds are righteous, virtuous, good.
    -2 active, diligent. (-m.) N. of Visvakarman.
    -कल a. one who has acquired a great reputation for liberality in giving and using (money &c,)
    -कलिल a. well filled with.
    -कल्प a. very qualified or skilled; कालेन यैर्वा विमिताः सुकल्पैर्भूपांसवः खे मिहिका द्युभासः Bhāg.1.14.7.
    -कल्पित a. well equip- ped or armed.
    -कल्य a. perfectly sound.
    -काण्डः the Kāravella plant.
    -काण्डिका the Kāṇḍīra creeper.
    -काण्डिन् a.
    1 having beautiful stems.
    -2 beautifully joined. (-m.) a bee.
    -काष्ठम् fire-wood.
    -कुन्दकः an onion.
    -कुमार a.
    1 very delicate or soft, smooth.
    -2 beautifully young or youthful.
    (-रः) 1 a beautiful youth.
    -2 a kind of sugar-cane.
    -3 a kind of grain (श्यामाक).
    -4 a kind of mustard.
    -5 the wild Cham- paka.
    (-रा) 1 the double jasmine.
    -2 the plantain.
    -3 the great-flowered jasmine.
    -कुमारकः 1 a beauti- ful youth.
    -2 rice (शालि).
    (-कम्) 1 the Tamāla- patra.
    -2 a particutar part of the ear.
    -कुमारी the Navamallikā jasmine.
    -कृत् a.
    1 doing good, benevolent.
    -2 pious, virtuous, righteous.
    -3 wise, learned.
    -4 for- tunate, lucky.
    -5 making good sacrifices or offerings. (-m.)
    1 a skilful worker.
    -2 N. of Tvaṣṭri.
    -कृत a.
    1 done well or properly.
    -2 thoroughly done; कच्चिन्नु सुकृतान्येव कृतरूपाणि वा पुनः । विदुस्ते सर्वकार्याणि Rām.2.1.2.
    -3 well made or constructed.
    -4 treated with kindness, assisted, befriended.
    -5 virtuous, righteous, pious.
    -6 lucky, fortunate.
    (-तम्) 1 any good or virtuous act, kindness, favour, service; नादत्ते कस्यचित् पापं न चैव सुकृतं विभुः Bg.5.15; Me.17.
    -2 virtue, moral or religious merit; स्वर्गाभिसंधिसुकृतं वञ्चनामिव मेनिरे Ku.6.47; तच्चिन्त्यमानं सुकृतं तवेति R.14.16.
    -3 fortune, auspiciousness.
    -4 recompense, reward.
    -5 Penance; तदभूरिवासरकृतं सुकृतैरुप- लभ्य वैभवमनन्यभवम् Ki.6.29.
    -कृतिः f.
    1 well-doing, a good act.
    -2 kindness, virtue.
    -3 practice of penance.
    -4 auspiciousness.
    -कृतिन् a.
    1 acting well or kindly.
    -2 virtuous, pious, good, righteous; सन्तः सन्तु निरापदः सुकृतिनां कीर्तिश्चिरं वर्धताम् H.4.132; चतुर्विधा भजन्ते मां जनाः सुकृतिनो$र्जुन Bg.7.16.
    -3 wise, learned.
    -4 benevolent.
    -5 fortunate, lucky.
    -कृत्यम् a good action; सुकृत्यं विष्णु- गुप्तस्य मित्राप्तिर्भार्गवस्य च Pt.2.45.
    -केश(स)रः the citron tree.
    -क्रतुः 1 N. of Agni.
    -2 of Śiva.
    -3 of Indra.
    -4 of Mitra and Varuṇa.
    -5 of the sun.
    -6 of Soma.
    -क्रयः a fair bargain.
    -क्षेत्र a. sprung from a good womb.
    -खल्लिका luxurious life.
    -ग a.
    1 going gracefully or well.
    -2 graceful, elegant.
    -3 easy of access; अकृत्यं मन्यते कृत्यमगम्यं मन्यते सुगम् । अभक्ष्यं मन्यते भक्ष्यं स्त्रीवाक्यप्रेरितो नरः ॥ Pt.2.148.
    -4 intelligible, easy to be understood (opp. दुर्ग). (
    -गः) a Gandharva; गीतैः सुगा वाद्यधराश्च वाद्यकैः Bhāg.1.12.34.
    (-गम्) 1 ordure, feces.
    -2 happiness.
    -गण् m. a good calculator; L. D. B. -a. counting well.
    -गणकः a good calculator or astronomer.
    -गत a.
    1 well-gone or passed.
    -2 well-bestowed. (
    -तः) an epithet of Buddha.
    -गतिः 1 Welfare, hap- piness.
    -2 a secure refuge.
    -गन्धः 1 fragrance, odour, perfume.
    -2 sulphur.
    -3 a trader.
    (-न्धम्) 1 sandal.
    -2 small cumin seed.
    -3 a blue lotus.
    -4 a kind of fragrant grass. (
    -न्धा) sacred basil.
    -गन्धकः 1 sulphur.
    -2 the red Tulasee.
    -3 the orange.
    -4 a kind of gourd,
    -गन्धमूला a land-growing lotus-plant; L. D. B.
    -गन्धारः an epithet of Śiva.
    -गन्धि a.
    1 sweet-smelling, fra- grant, redolent with perfumes.
    -2 virtuous, pious.
    (-न्धिः) 1 perfume, fragrance.
    -2 the Supreme Being.
    -3 a kind of sweet-smelling mango. (
    -न्धि n.)
    1 the root of long pepper.
    -2 a kind of fragrant grass.
    -3 cori- ander seed. ˚त्रिफला
    1 nutmeg.
    -2 areca nut.
    -3 cloves. ˚मूलम् the root Uśīra. ˚मूषिका the musk-rat.
    -गन्धिकः 1 incense.
    -2 sulphur.
    -3 a kind of rice. (
    -कम्) the white lotus.
    -गम a.
    1 easy of access, accessible.
    -2 easy.
    -3 plain, intelligible.
    -गरम् cinnabar.
    -गहना an enclosure round a place of sacrifice to exclude profane access. ˚वृत्तिः f. the same as above.
    -गात्री a beautiful woman.
    -गृद्ध a. intensely longing for.
    -गृह a. (
    -ही f.) having a beautiful house or abode, well-lodged; सुगृही निर्गृहीकृता Pt.1.39.
    -गृहीत a.
    1 held well or firmly, grasped.
    -2 used or applied properly or auspiciously. ˚नामन् a.
    1 one whose name is auspiciously invoked, one whose name it is auspicious to utter (as Bali, Yudhi- ṣṭhira), a term used as a respectful mode of speaking; सुगृहीतनाम्नः भट्टगोपालस्य पौत्रः Māl.1.
    -ग्रासः a dainty mor- sel.
    -ग्रीव a. having a beautiful neck.
    (-वः) 1 a hero.
    -2 a swan.
    -3 a kind of weapon.
    -4 N. of one of the four horses of Kṛiṣṇa.
    -5 of Śiva.
    -6 of Indra.
    -7 N. of a monkey-chief and brother of Vāli. [By the advice of Kabandha, Rāma went to Sugrīva who told him how his brother had treated him and besought his assistance in recovering his wife, promising at the same time that he would assist Rāma in recovering his wife Sīta. Rāma, therfore, killed vāli, and installed Sugrīva on the throne. He then assisted Rāma with his hosts of monkeys in conquering Rāvaṇa, and recovering Sīta.] ˚ईशः N. of Rāma; सुग्रीवेशः कटी पातु Rāma-rakṣā.8.
    -ग्ल a. very weary or fatigued.
    -घोष a. having a pleasant sound. (
    -षः) N. of the conch of Nakula; नकुलः सहदेवश्च सुघोषमणपुष्पकौ Bg.1.16.
    -चक्षुस् a. having good eyes, seeing well. (-m.)
    1 discerning or wise man, learned man.
    -2 The glomerous fig-tree.
    -चरित, -चरित्र a.
    1 well-conducted, well-behaved; वृषभैकादशा गाश्च दद्यात् सुचरितव्रतः Ms.11.116.
    -2 moral, virtuous; तान् विदित्वा सुचरितैर्गूढैस्तत्कर्मकारिभिः Ms.9.261. (
    -तम्, -त्रम्) 1 good conduct, virtuous deeds.
    -2 merit; तव सुचरितमङ्गुलीय नूनं प्रतनु Ś.6.1. (
    -ता, -त्रा) a well-conducted, devoted, and virtuous wife.
    -चर्मन् m. the Bhūrja tree.
    -चित्रकः 1 a king fisher.
    -2 a kind of speckled snake.
    -चित्रा a kind of gourd.
    -चिन्ता, -चिन्तनम् deep thought, deep reflection or consideration.
    -चिरम् ind. for a very long time, very long.
    -चिरायुस् m. a god, deity.
    -चुटी a pair of nippers or tongs.
    -चेतस् a.
    1 well-minded.
    -2 wise.
    -चेतीकृत a. with the heart satiated; well- disposed; ततः सुचेतीकृतपौरभृत्यः Bk.3.2.
    -चेलकः a fine cloth.
    -च्छद a. having beautiful leaves.
    -छत्रः N. of Śiva. (
    -त्रा) the river Sutlej.
    -जन a.
    1 good, virtuous, respectable.
    -2 kind, benevolent.
    (-नः) 1 a good or virtuous man, benevolent man.
    -2 a gentleman.
    -3 N. of Indra's charioteer.
    -जनता 1 goodness, kind- ness, benevolence, virtue; ऐश्वर्यस्य विभूषणं सुजनता Bh.2. 82.
    -2 a number of good men.
    -3 bravery.
    -जन्मन् a.
    1 of noble or respectable birth; या कौमुदी नयनयोर्भवतः सुजन्मा Māl.1.34.
    -2 legitimate, lawfully born.
    -जलम् a lotus.
    -जल्पः 1 a good speech.
    -2 a kind of speech thus described by Ujjvalamaṇi; यत्रार्जवात् सगाम्भीर्यं सदैन्यं सहचापलम् । सोत्कण्ठं च हरिः स्पृष्टः स सुजल्पो निगद्यते ॥
    -जात a.
    1 well-grown, tall.
    -2 well made or produced.
    -3 of high birth.
    -4 beautiful, lovely; सुजातं कल्याणी भवतु कृत- कृत्यः स च युवा Māl.1.16; R.3.8.
    -5 very delicate; खिद्यत् सुजाताङ्घ्रितलामुन्निन्ये प्रेयसीं प्रियः Bhāg.1.3.31.
    -डीनकम् a kind of flight of birds; Mb.8.41.27 (com. पश्चाद् गतिः पराडीनं स्वर्गगं सुडीनकम्).
    -तनु a.
    1 having a beautiful body.
    -2 extremely delicate or slender, very thin.
    -3 emaciated. (
    -नुः, -नूः f.) a lovely lady; एताः सुतनु मुखं ते सख्यः पश्यन्ति हेमकूटगताः V.1.1; Ś.7.24.
    -तन्त्री a.
    1 well-stringed.
    -2 (hence) melodious.
    -तपस् a.
    1 one who practises austere penance; a वानप्रस्थ; स्विष्टिः स्वधीतिः सुतपा लोकाञ्जयति यावतः Mb.12.71.3.
    -2 having great heat. (-m.)
    1 an ascetic, a devotee, hermit, an anchorite.
    -2 the sun. (-n.) an austere penance.
    -तप्त a.
    1 greatly harassed, afflicted.
    -2 very severe (as a penance); तपसैव सुतप्तेन मुच्यन्ते किल्बिषात्ततः Ms.11.239.
    -तमाम् ind. most excellently, best.
    -तराम् ind.
    1 bet- ter, more excellently.
    -2 exceedingly, very, very much, excessively; तया दुहित्रा सुतरां सवित्री स्फुरत्प्रभामण्डलया चकाशे Ku.1.24; सुतरां दयालुः R.2.53;7.21;14.9;18.24.
    -3 more so, much more so; मय्यप्यास्था न ते चेत्त्वयि मम सुतरा- मेष राजन् गतो$ स्मि Bh.3.3.
    -4 consequently.
    -तर्दनः the (Indian) cuckco.
    -तर्मन् a. good for crossing over; सुतर्माणमधिनावं रुहेम Ait. Br.1.13; (cf. also यज्ञो वै सुतर्मा).
    -तलम् 1 'immense depth', N. of one of the seven regi- ons below the earth; see पाताल; (याहि) सुतलं स्वर्गीभिः प्रार्थ्यं ज्ञातिभिः परिवारितः Bhāg.8.22.33.
    -2 the foundation of a large building.
    -तान a. melodious.
    -तार a.
    1 very bright.
    -2 very loud; सुतारैः फूत्कारैः शिव शिव शिवेति प्रतनुमः Bh.3.2.
    -3 having a beautiful pupil (as an eye). (
    -रः) a kind of perfume. (
    -रा) (in Sāṁkhya) one of the nine kinds of acquiescence.
    -तिक्तकः the coral tree.
    -तीक्ष्ण a.
    1 very sharp.
    -2 very pungent.
    -3 acutely painful.
    (-क्ष्णः) 1 the Śigru tree.
    -2 N. of a sage; नाम्ना सुतीक्ष्णश्चरितेन दान्तः R.13.41. ˚दशनः an epithet of Śiva.
    -तीर्थः 1 a good preceptor.
    -2 N. of Śiva. -a. easily crossed or traversed.
    -तुङ्ग a. very lofty or tall.
    (-ङ्गः) 1 the cocoa-nut tree.
    -2 the culminating point of a planet.
    -तुमुल a. very loud.
    -तेजन a. well-pointed, sharpened. (
    -नः) a well-pointed arrow.
    -तेजस् a.
    1 very sharp.
    -2 very bright, or splendid.
    -3 very mighty. (-m.) a worshipper of the sun.
    -दक्षिण a.
    1 very sincere or upright.
    -2 liberal or rich in sacrificial gifts; यज्ञैर्भूरिसुदक्षिणैः सुविहितैः संप्राप्यते यत् फलम् Pt.1. 31.
    -3 very skilful.
    -4 very polite. (
    -णा) N. of the wife of Dilīpa; तस्य दाक्षिण्यरूढेन नाम्ना मगधवंशजा पत्नी सुदक्षिणेत्यासीत् R.1.31;3.1.
    -दण्डः a cane, ratan.
    -दत् a. (
    -ती f.) having handsome teeth; जगाद भूयः सुदतीं सुनन्दा R.6.37.
    -दन्तः 1 a good tooth.
    -2 an actor; a dancer. (
    -न्ती) the female elephant of the north-west quarter.
    -दर्श a. lovely, gracious looking; सुदर्शः स्थूललक्षयश्च न भ्रश्येत सदा श्रियः Mb.12.56.19 (com. सुदर्शः प्रसन्नवक्त्रः).
    -दर्शन a. (
    -ना or
    -नी f.)
    1 good-looking, beautiful, handsome.
    -2 easily seen. (
    -नः) the discus of Viṣṇu; as in कृष्णो$प्यसु- दर्शनः K.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -3 of mount Meru.
    -4 a vul- ture. (
    -नी, -नम्) N. of Amarāvatī, Indra's capital. (
    -नम्) N. of Jambudvīpa.
    -दर्शना 1 a handsome wo- man.
    -2 a woman.
    -3 an order, a command.
    -4 a kind of drug.
    -दास् a. very bountiful.
    -दान्तः a Buddhist.
    -दामन् a. one who gives liberally. (-m.)
    1 a cloud.
    -2 a moun- tain.
    -3 the sea.
    -4 N. of Indra's elephant.
    -5 N. of a very poor Brāhmaṇa who came to Dvārakā with only a small quantity of parched rice as a present to his friend Kṛiṣṇa, and was raised by him to wealth and glory.
    -दायः 1 a good or auspicious gift.
    -2 a special gift given on particular solemn occasions.
    -3 one who offers such a gift.
    -दिनम् 1 a happy or auspicious day.
    -2 a fine day or weather (opp दुर्दिनम्); so सुदिनाहम् in the same sense.
    -दिह् a. well-polished, bright.
    -दीर्घ a. very long or extended. (
    -र्घा) a kind of cucumber.
    -दुराधर्ष a.
    1 very hard to get.
    -2 quite intolerable.
    -दुरावर्त a. a very hard to be convinced.
    -दुरासद a. unapproachable.
    -दुर्जर a. very difficult to be digested.
    -दुर्मनस् a. very troubled in mind.
    -दुर्मर्ष a. quite in- tolerable.
    -दुर्लभ a. very scarce or rare.
    -दुश्चर a.
    1 inaccessible.
    -2 very painful.
    -दुश्चिकित्स a. very difficult to be cured.
    -दुष्प्रभः a chameleon.
    -दूर a. very distant or remote. (
    -सुदूरम् means
    1 to a great distance.
    -2 to a very high degree, very much; सुदूरं पीडयेत् कामः शरद्गुणनिरन्तरः Rām.4.3.12.
    -सुदूरात् 'from afar, from a distance').
    -दृढ a. very firm or hard, compact.
    -दृश् a. having beautiful eyes. (-f.) a pretty woman.
    -देशिकः a good guide.
    -धन्वन् a. having an excellent bow. (-m.)
    1 a good archer or bowman.
    -2 Ananta, the great serpent.
    -3 N. of Viśvakarman. ˚आचार्यः a mixed caste; वैश्यात्तु जायते व्रात्यात् सुधन्वाचार्य एव च Ms.1.23.
    -धर्मन् a. attentive to duties. (-f.) the council or assembly of gods. (-m.)
    1 the hall or palace of Indra.
    -2 one diligent in properly maintaining his family.
    -धर्मा, -र्मी 1 the council or assembly of gods (देवसभा); ययावुदीरितालोकः सुधर्मानवमां सभाम् R.17.27.
    -2 (सुधर्मा) N. of Dvārakā; दिवि भुव्यन्तरिक्षे च महोत्पातान् समु- त्थितान् । दृष्ट्वासीनान् सुधर्मायां कृष्णः प्राह यदूनिदम् ॥ Bhāg.11.3. 4;1.14.34.
    -धात a. well cleaned.
    -धार a. well-pointed (as an arrow).
    -धित a. Ved.
    1 perfect, secure.
    -2 kind, good.
    -3 happy, prosperous.
    -4 well-aimed or directed (as a weapon).
    -धी a. having a good understanding, wise, clever, intelligent. (
    -धीः) a wise or intelligent man, learned man or pandit. (-f.) a good under- standing, good sense, intelligence. ˚उपास्यः
    1 a particu- lar kind of royal palace.
    -2 N. of an attendant on Kṛiṣṇa. (
    -स्यम्) the club of Balarāma. ˚उपास्या
    1 a woman.
    -2 N. of Umā, or of one of her female com- panions.
    -3 a sort of pigment.
    -ध्रूम्रवर्णा one of the seven tongues of fire.
    -नन्दम् N. of Balarāma's club; प्रतिजग्राह बलवान् सुनन्देनाहनच्च तम् Bhāg.1.67.18.
    -नन्दः a kind of royal palace.
    -नन्दा 1 N. of a woman.
    -2 N. of Pārvatī; L. D. B.
    -3 yellow pigment; L. D. B.
    -नयः 1 good conduct.
    -2 good policy.
    - नयन a. having beau- tiful eyes. (
    -नः) a deer.
    (-ना) 1 a woman having beautiful eyes.
    -2 a woman in general.
    -नाभ a.
    1 having a beautiful navel.
    -2 having a good nave or cen- tre.
    (-भः) 1 a mountain.
    -2 the Maināka mountain, q. v. (
    -भम्) a wheel, discus (सुदर्शन); ये संयुगे$चक्षत तार्क्ष्यपुत्रमंसे सुनाभायुधमापतन्तम् Bhāg.3.2.24.
    -नालम् a red water-lily.
    -निःष्ठित a. quite ready.
    -निर्भृत a. very lonely or private. (
    -तम्) ind. very secretly or closely, very narrowly, privately.
    -निरूढ a. well-purged by an injection; Charaka.
    -निरूहणम् a good purgative.
    -निर्णिक्त a. well polished.
    -निश्चलः an epithet of Śiva.
    -निषण्णः (-कः) the herb Marsilea Quadrifolia (Mar. कुऱडू).
    -निहित a. well-established.
    -नीत a.
    1 well-con- ducted, well-behaved.
    -2 polite, civil.
    (-तनि) 1 good conduct or behaviour.
    -2 good policy or prodence.
    -नीतिः f.
    1 good conduct, good manners, propriety.
    -2 good policy.
    -3 N. of the mother of Dhruva, q. v.
    -नीथ a. well-disposed, well conducted, righteous, vir- tuous, good.
    (-थः) 1 a Brāhmaṇa.
    -2 N. of Śiśupāla, q. v.; तस्मिन्नभ्यर्चिते कृष्णे सुनीथः शत्रुकर्षणः Mb.1.39.11.
    -3 Ved. a good leader.
    -नील a. very black or blue. (
    -लः) the pomegranate tree. (
    -ला) common flax.
    (-लम्), -नीलकः a blue gem.
    -नु n. water.
    -नेत्र a. having good or beautiful eyes.
    -पक्व a.
    1 well-cooked.
    -2 thoroughly matured or ripe. (
    -क्वः) a sort of fra- grant mango.
    -पठ a. legible.
    -पत्नी a woman having a good husband.
    -पत्र a.
    1 having beautiful wings.
    -2 well-feathered (an arrow).
    -पथः 1 a good road.
    -2 a good course.
    -3 good conduct.
    -पथिन् m. (nom. sing. सुपन्थाः) a good road.
    -पद्मा orris root.
    -परीक्षित a. well-examined.
    -पर्ण a. (
    -र्णा or
    -र्णी f.)
    1 well-winged; तं भूतनिलयं देवं सुपर्णमुपधावत Bhāg.8.1.11.
    -2 having good or beautiful leaves.
    (-र्णः) 1 a ray of the sun.
    -2 a class of bird-like beings of a semi-divine charac- ter.
    -3 any supernatural bird.
    -4 an epithet of Garuḍa; ततः सुपर्णव्रजपक्षजन्मा नानागतिर्मण्डलयन् जवेन Ki.16.44.
    -5 a cock.
    -6 the knowing (ज्ञानरूप); देहस्त्वचित्पुरुषो$यं सुपर्णः क्रुध्येत कस्मै नहि कर्ममूलम् Bhāg.11.23.55.
    -7 Any bird; द्वा सुपर्णा सयुजा सखाया समानं वृक्षं परिषस्वजाते Muṇd. 3.1.1. ˚केतुः N. of Viṣṇu; तमकुण्ठमुखाः सुपर्णकेतोरिषवः क्षिप्तमिषुव्रजं परेण Śi.2.23.
    -पर्णकः = सुपर्ण.
    -पर्णा, -पर्णी f.
    1 a number of lotuses.
    -2 a pool abounding in lotuses.
    -3 N. of the mother of Garuḍa.
    -पर्यवदात a. very clean.
    -पर्याप्त a.
    1 very spacious; तस्य मध्ये सुपर्याप्तं कारयेद् गृहमात्मनः Ms.7.76.
    -2 well-fitted.
    -पर्वन् a. well- jointed, having many joints or knots. (-m.)
    1 a bam- boo.
    -2 an arrow.
    -3 a god, deity; विहाय या सर्वसुपर्व- नायकम् N.4.9;14.41,76.
    -4 a special lunar day (as the day of full or new moon, and the 8th and 14th day of each fortnight).
    -5 smoke. (-f.) white Dūrvā grass.
    -पलायित a.
    1 completely fled or run away.
    -2 skilfully retreated.
    -पाक्यम् a kind of medicinal salt (Mar. बिडलोण).
    -पात्रम् 1 a good or suitable vessel, worthy receptacle.
    -2 a fit or competent person, any one well-fitted for an office, an able person.
    -पाद् (
    -पाद् or
    -पदी f.) having good or handsome feet.
    -पार्श्वः 1 the waved-leaf fig-tree (प्लक्ष).
    -2 N. of the son of Sampāti, elder brother of Jaṭāyu.
    -पालि a. distinguished.
    -पीतम् 1 a carrot.
    -2 yellow sandal. (
    -तः) the fifth Muhūrta.
    -पुंसी a woman having a good husband.
    -पुरम् a strong fortress.
    -पुष्प a. (
    -ष्पा or
    -ष्पी f.) having beautiful flowers.
    (-ष्पः) 1 the coral tree.
    -2 the Śirīṣa tree. (
    -ष्पी) the plantain tree.
    (-ष्पम्) 1 cloves.
    -2 the menstrual excretion.
    -पुष्पित a.
    1 well blossomed, being in full flower.
    -2 having the hair thrilling or bristling.
    -पूर a.
    1 easy to be filled; सुपूरा स्यात् कुनदिका सुपूरो मूषिकाञ्जलिः Pt.1.25.
    -2 well-filling. (
    -रः) a kind of citron (बीजपूर).
    -पूरकः the Baka-puṣpa tree.
    -पेशस् a. beautiful, tender; रत्नानां पद्मरागो$स्मि पद्मकोशः सुपेशसाम् Bhāg.11.16.3. ˚कृत् m. a kind of fly; Bhāg.11.7.34.
    -प्रकाश a.
    1 manifest, apparent; ज्येष्ठे मासि नयेत् सीमां सुप्रकाशेषु सेतुषु Ms.8.245.
    -2 public, notorious.
    -प्रतर्कः a sound judgment.
    -प्रतिभा spirituous liquor.
    -प्रतिष्ठ a.
    1 standing well.
    -2 very celebrated, renowned, glorious, famous.
    (-ष्ठा) 1 good position.
    -2 good reputation, fame, celebrity.
    -3 esta- blishment, erection.
    -4 installation, consecration.
    -प्रतिष्ठित a.
    1 well-established.
    -2 consecrated.
    -3 ce- lebrated. (
    -तः) the Udumbara tree.
    -प्रतिष्णात a.
    1 thoroughly purified.
    -2 well-versed in.
    -3 well-investi- gated, clearly ascertained or determined.
    -प्रतीक a.
    1 having a beautiful shape, lovely, handsome; भगवान् भागवतवात्सल्यतया सुप्रतीकः Bhāg.5.3.2.
    -2 having a beau- tiful trunk.
    (-कः) 1 an epithet of Kāmadeva.
    -2 of Śiva.
    -3 of the elephant of the north-east quarter.
    -4 An honest man; स्तेयोपायैर्विरचितकृतिः सुप्रतीको यथास्ते Bhāg.1.8.31.
    -प्रपाणम् a good tank.
    -प्रभ a. very brilliant, glorious. (
    -भा) one of the seven tongues of fire.
    -प्रभातम् 1 an auspicious dawn or day-break; दिष्टथा सुप्रभातमद्य यदयं देवो दृष्टः U.6.
    -2 the earliest dawn.
    -प्रभावः omnipotence.
    -प्रमाण a. large-sized.
    -प्रयुक्तशरः a skilful archer.
    -प्रयोगः 1 good management or ap- plication.
    -2 close contact.
    -3 dexterity.
    -प्रलापः good speech, eloquence.
    -प्रसन्नः N. of Kubera.
    -प्रसाद a. very gracious or propitious. (
    -दः) N. of Śiva.
    -प्रातम् a fine morning.
    -प्रिय a. very much liked, agreeable. (
    -यः) (in prosody) a foot of two short syllables.
    (-या) 1 a charming woman.
    -2 a beloved mistress.
    -प्रौढा a marriageable girl.
    -फल a.
    1 very fruitful, very productive.
    -2 very fertile.
    (-लः) 1 the pomegranate tree.
    -2 the jujube.
    -3 the Karṇikāra tree.
    -4 a kind of bean.
    (-ला) 1 a pumpkin, gourd.
    -2 the plan- tain tree.
    -3 a variety of brown grape.
    -4 colocynth.
    -फेनः a cuttle-fish bone.
    -बन्धः sesamum.
    -बभ्रु a. dark-brown.
    -बल a. very powerful.
    (-लः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 N. of the father of Śakuni.
    -बान्धवः N. of Śiva.
    -बाल a. very childish.
    -बाहु a.
    1 handsome- armed.
    -2 strong-armed. (
    -हुः) N. of a demon, brother of Mārīcha, who had become a demon by the curse of Agastya. He with Mārīcha began to disturb the sacrifice of Viśvāmitra, but was defeated by Rāma. and Lakṣmaṇa; यः सुबाहुरिति राक्षसो$परस्तत्र तत्र विससर्प मायया R.11.29.
    -बीजम् good seed; सुबीजं चैव सुक्षेत्रे जातं संपद्यते तथा Ms.1.69.
    (-जः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 the poppy.
    -बोध a.
    1 easily apprehended or understood. (
    -धः) good information or advice.
    -ब्रह्मण्यः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya.
    -2 N. of one of the sixteen priests employed at a sacrifice.
    -भग a.
    1 very fortu- nate or prosperous, happy, blessed, highly favoured.
    -2 lovely, charming, beautiful, pretty; न तु ग्रीष्मस्यैवं सुभगमपराद्धं युवतिषु Ś.3.9; Ku.4.34; R.11.8; Māl.9.
    -3 pleasant, grateful, agreeable, sweet; दिवसाः सुभगा- दित्याश्छायासलिलदुर्भगाः Rām.3.16.1; श्रवणसुभग M.3.4; Ś.1.3.
    -4 beloved, liked, amiable, dear; सुमुखि सुभगः पश्यन् स त्वामुपैतु कृतार्थताम् Gīt.5.
    -5 illustrious.
    (-गः) 1 borax.
    -2 the Aśoka tree.
    -3 the Champaka tree.
    -4 red amarnath. (
    -गम्) good fortune. ˚मानिन्, सुभगं- मन्य a.
    1 considering oneself fortunate, amiable, pleasing; वाचालं मां न खलु सुभगंमन्यभावः करोति Me.96.
    -2 vain, flattering oneself.
    -भगा 1 a woman beloved by her hus- band, a favourite wife.
    -2 an honoured mother.
    -3 a kind of wild jasmine.
    -4 turmeric.
    -5 the Priyaṅgu creeper.
    -6 the holy basil.
    -7 a woman having her husband alive (सौभाग्यवती); जयशब्दैर्द्विजाग्र्याणां सुभगानर्तितै- स्तथा Mb.7.7.9.
    -8 a five-year old girl representing Durgā at festivals.
    -9 musk. ˚सुत the son of a favou- rite wife.
    -भङ्गः the cocoa-nut tree.
    -भटः a great war- rior, champion, soldier.
    -भट्टः a learned man.
    -भद्र a. very happy or fortunate. (
    -द्रः) N. of Viṣṇu; साकं साकम्पमंसे वसति विदधती बासुभद्रं सुभद्रम् Viṣṇupāda S.31. (
    -द्रा) N. of the sister of Balarāma and Kṛiṣṇa, married to Arjuna q. v. She bore to him a son named Abhimanyu.
    -भद्रकः 1 a car for carrying the image of a god.
    -2 the Bilva tree.
    -भाषित a.
    1 spoken well or eloquent.
    (-तम्) 1 fine speech, eloquence, learning; जीर्णमङ्गे सुभाषितम् Bh.3.2.
    -2ल a witty saying, an apophthegm, an apposite saying; सुभाषितेन गीतेन युवतीनां च लीलया । मनो न भिद्यते यस्य स वै मुक्तो$थवा पशुः Subhāṣ.
    -3 a good remark; बालादपि सुभाषितम् (ग्राह्यम्).
    -भिक्षम् 1 good alms, successful begging.
    -2 abundance of food, an abundant supply of provisions, plenty of corn &c.
    -भीरकः the Palāśa tree.
    -भीरुकम् silver.
    -भूतिः 1 well-being, wel- fare.
    -2 the Tittira bird; Gīrvāṇa.
    -भूतिकः the Bilva tree.
    -भूषणम् a type of pavilion where a ceremony is performed on a wife's perceiving the first signs of con- ception; सुभूषणाख्यं विप्राणां योग्यं पुंसवनार्थकम् Māna.34.354.
    -भृत a.
    1 well-paid.
    -2 heavily laden.
    -भ्रू a. having beautiful eyebrows. (
    -भ्रूः f.) a lovely woman. (N. B. The vocative singular of this word is strictly सुभ्रूः; but सुभ्रु is used by writers like Bhaṭṭi. Kālidāsa, and Bhavabhūti; हा पितः क्वासि हे सुभ्रु Bk.6.17; so V.3.22; Ku.5.43; Māl.3.8.)
    -मङ्गल a.
    1 very auspicious.
    -2 abounding in sacrifices.
    -मति a. very wise. (
    -तिः f.)
    1 a good mind or disposition, kindness, benevolence, friendship.
    -2 a favour of the gods.
    -3 a gift, blessing.
    -4 a prayer, hymn.
    -5 a wish or desire.
    -6 N. of the wife of Sagara and mother of 6, sons.
    -मदनः the mango tree.
    -मदात्मजा a celestial damsel.
    -मधुरम् a very sweet or gentle speech, agreeable words.
    -मध्य, -मध्यम a. slender-waisted.
    -मध्या, -मध्यमा a graceful woman.
    -मन a. very charming, lovely, beautiful.
    (-नः) 1 wheat.
    -2 the thorn-apple. (
    -ना) the great-flowered jasmine.
    -मनस् a.
    1 good-minded, of a good disposition, benevolent; शान्तसंकल्पः सुमना यथा स्याद्वीतमन्युर्गौतमो माभिमृत्यो Kaṭh.1.1.
    -2 well-pleased, satisfied; (hence
    -सुमनीभू = to be at ease; जिते नृपारौ समनीभवन्ति शद्बायमानान्यशनैरशङ्कम् Bk.2.54.). (-m.)
    1 a god, divinity.
    -2 a learned man.
    -3 a student of the Vedas.
    -4 wheat.
    -5 the Nimba tree. (-f., n.; said to be pl. only by some) a flower; मुमुचुर्मुनयो देवाः सुमनांसि मुदान्विताः Bhāg.1.3.7; रमणीय एष वः सुमनसां संनिवेशः Māl.1. (where the adjectival; sense in 1 is also intended); किं सेव्यते सुमनसां मनसापि गन्धः कस्तू- रिकाजननशक्तिभृता मृगेण R.G; Śi.6.66. ˚वर्णकम् flowers, unguent or perfume etc. for the body; सा तदाप्रभृति सुमनो- वर्णकं नेच्छति Avimārakam 2. (-f.)
    1 the great-flowered jasmine.
    -2 the Mālatī creeper. ˚फलः the woodapple. ˚फलम् nutmeg.
    -मनस्क a. cheerful, happy.
    -मन्तु a.
    1 advising well.
    -2 very faulty or blameable. (-m.) a good adviser.
    -मन्त्रः N. of the charioteer of Daśāratha.
    -मन्दभाज् a. very unfortunate.
    -मर्दित a. much harassed.
    -मर्षण a. easy to be borne.
    -मित्रा 1 N. of one of the wives of Daśāratha and mother of Lakṣmaṇa and Śatrughna.
    -मुख a. (
    -खा or
    -खी f.)
    1 having a beautiful face, lovely.
    -2 pleasing.
    -3 disposed to, eager for; सुरसद्मयानसुमुखी जनता Ki.6.42.
    -4 favour- able, kind.
    -5 well-pointed (as an arrow).
    -6 (सुमुखा) having a good entrance.
    (-खः) 1 a learned man.
    -2 an epithet of Garuḍa.
    -3 of Gaṇeśa; सुमुखश्चैकदन्तश्च कपिलो गजकर्णकः Maṅgal. S.1.
    -4 of Śiva.
    (-खम्) 1 the scratch of a finger-nail.
    -2 a kind of building.
    (-खा, -खी) 1 a handsome woman.
    -2 a mirror.
    -मूलकम् a carrot.
    -मृत a. stone-dead.
    -मेखलः the Muñja grass.
    -मेधस a. having a good understanding, wise, intelligent; इमे अङ्गिरसः सत्रमासते$द्य सुमेधसः Bhāg.9.4.3. (-m.) a wise man. (-f.) heart-pea.
    -मेरुः 1 the sac- red mountain Meru, q. v.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -यन्त्रित a.
    1 well-governed.
    -2 self-controlled.
    -यमाः a parti- cular class of gods; जातो रुचेरजनयत् सुयमान् सुयज्ञ आकूति- सूनुरमरानथ दक्षिणायाम् Bhāg.2.7.2.
    -यवसम् beautiful grass, good pasturage.
    -यामुनः 1 a palace.
    -2 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -युक्तः N. of Śiva.
    -योगः 1 a favourable junc- ture.
    -2 good opportunity.
    -योधनः an epithet of Duryodhana q. v.
    -रक्त a.
    1 well coloured.
    -2 im- passioned.
    -3 very lovely.
    -4 sweet-voiced; सुरक्तगोपी- जनगीतनिःस्वने Ki.4.33.
    -रक्तकः 1 a kind of red chalk.
    -2 a kind of mango tree.
    -रङ्गः 1 good colour.
    -2 the orange.
    -3 a hole cut in a house (सुरङ्गा also in this sense).
    (-ङ्गम्) 1 red sanders.
    -2 vermilion. ˚धातुः red chalk. ˚युज् m. a house-breaker.
    -रङ्गिका the Mūrvā plant.
    -रजःफलः the jack-fruit tree.
    -रञ्जनः the betel nut tree.
    -रत a.
    1 much sported.
    -2 playful.
    -3 much enjoyed.
    -4 compassionate, tender.
    (-तम्) 1 great delight or enjoyment.
    -2 copulation, sexual union or intercourse, coition; सुरतमृदिता बालवनिता Bh.2. 44. ˚गुरुः the husband; पर्यच्छे सरसि हृतें$शुके पयोभिर्लोलाक्षे सुरतगुरावपत्रपिष्णोः Śi.8.46. ˚ताण्डवम् vigorous sexual movements; अद्यापि तां सुरतताण्डवसूत्रधारीं (स्मरामि) Bil. Ch. Uttara.28. ˚ताली
    1 a female messenger, a go-between.
    -2 a chaplet, garland for the head. ˚प्रसंगः addiction to amorous pleasures; कालक्रमेणाथ योः प्रवृत्ते स्वरूपयोग्ये सुरत- प्रसंगे Ku.1.19.
    -रतिः f. great enjoyment or satis- faction.
    -रस a. well-flavoured, juicy, savoury.
    -2 sweet.
    -3 elegant (as a composition). (
    -सः, -सा) the plant सिन्धुवार. (
    -सा) N. of Durgā. (
    -सा, -सम्) the sacred basil.
    (-सम्) 1 gum-myrrh.
    -2 fragrant grass.
    -राजन् a. governed by a good king; सुराज्ञि देशे राजन्वान् Ak. (-m.)
    1 a good king.
    -2 a divinity.
    -राजिका a small house-lizard.
    -राष्ट्रम् N. of a country on the western side of India (Surat). ˚जम् a kind of poison.
    -2 a sort of black bean (Mar. तूर). ˚ब्रह्मः a Brāhmaṇa of Surāṣṭra.
    -रूप a.
    1 well-formed, handsome, love- ly; सुरूपा कन्या.
    -2 wise, learned. (
    -पः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -रूहकः a horse resembling an ass.
    -रेतस् n. mental power (चिच्छक्ति); सुरेतसादः पुनराविश्य चष्टे Bhāg. 5.7.14.
    -रेभ a. fine-voiced; स्यन्दना नो चतुरगाः सुपेभा वाविपत्तयः । स्यन्दना नो च तुरगाः सुरेभा वा विपत्तयः ॥ Ki.15.16. (
    -भम्) tin.
    -लक्षण a.
    1 having auspicious or beautiful marks.
    -2 fortunate.
    (-णम्) 1 observing, examining carefully, determining, ascertaining.
    -2 a good or auspicious mark.
    -लक्षित a. well determined or ascertained; तुलामानं प्रतीमानं सर्वं च स्यात् सुलक्षितम् Ms.8.43.
    -लग्नः, -ग्नम् an auspicious moment.
    -लभ a.
    1 easy to be obtained, easy of attainment, attainable, feasible; न सुलभा सकलेन्दुमुखी च सा V.2.9; इदमसुलभवस्तुप्रार्थनादुर्नि- वारम् 2.6.
    -2 ready for, adapted to, fit, suitable; निष्ठ्यूतश्चरणोपभोगसुलभो लाक्षारसः केनचित् Ś.4.4.
    -3 natural to, proper for; मानुषतासुलभो लघिमा K. ˚कोप a. easily provoked, irascible.
    -लिखित a. well registered.
    -लुलित a.
    1 moving playfully.
    -2 greatly hurt, injured.
    -लोचन a. fine-eyed. (
    -नः) a deer.
    (-ना) 1 a beauti- ful woman.
    -2 N. of the wife of Indrajit.
    -लोहकम् brass.
    -लोहित a. very red. (
    -ता) one of the seven tongues of fire.
    -वक्त्रम् 1 a good face or mouth.
    -2 correct utterance. (
    -क्त्रः) N. of Śiva.
    -वचनम्, -वचस् n. eloquence. -a. eloquent.
    -वयस् f. a hermaphrodite.
    -वर्चकः, -वर्चिकः, -का, -वर्चिन् m. natron, alkali.
    -वर्चला 1 N. of the wife of the sun; तं चाहमनुवर्तिष्ये यथा सूर्यं सुवर्चला Rām.2.3.3.
    -2 linseed.
    -वर्चसः N. of Śiva.
    -वर्चस्क a. splendid, brilliant.
    -वर्ण see s. v.
    -वर्तित 1 well rounded.
    -2 well arranged.
    -वर्तुलः a water-melon.
    -वसन्तः 1 an agreeable vernal season.
    -2 the day of full moon in the month of Chaitra, or a festival celebrated in honour of Kāmadeva in that month (also सुवसन्तकः in this sense).
    -वह a.
    1 bearing well, patient.
    -2 patient, enduring.
    -3 easy to be borne-
    (-हा) 1 a lute.
    -2 N. of several plants like रास्ना, निर्गुण्डी &c.; Mātaṅga L.1.1.
    -वासः 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 a pleasant dwelling.
    -3 an agreeable perfume or odo- ur.
    -वासकः a water-melon.
    -वासरा cress.
    -वासिनी 1 a woman married or single who resides in her father's house.
    -2 a married woman whose husband is alive.
    -विक्रान्त a. very valiant or bold, chivalrous; सुविक्रान्तस्य नृपतेः सर्वमेव महीतलम् Śiva. B.16.45. (
    -न्तः) a hero. (
    -न्तम्) heroism.
    -विग्रह a. having a beautiful figure.
    -विचक्षण a. very clever, wise.
    -विद् m. a learned man, shrewd person. (-f.) a shrewd or clever woman.
    -विदः 1 an attendant on the women's apartments.
    -2 a king.
    -विदग्ध a. very cunning, astute.
    -विदत् m. a king
    -विदत्रम् 1 a household, family.
    -2 wealth.
    -3 grace, favour.
    -विदल्लः an attendant on the women's apart- ments (wrongly for सौविदल्ल q. v.). (
    -ल्लम्) the wo- men's apartments, harem.
    -विदल्ला a married woman.
    -विध a. of a good kind.
    -विधम् ind. easily.
    -विधिः a good rule, ordinance.
    -विनीत a.
    1 well trained, modest.
    -2 well executed. (
    -ता) a tractable cow.
    -विनेय a. easy to be trained or educated.
    -विभक्त a. well pro- portioned, symmetrical.
    -विरूढ a.
    1 fully grown up or developed.
    -2 well ridden.
    -विविक्त a.
    1 solitary (as a wood).
    -2 well decided (as a question).
    -विहित a.
    1 well-placed, well-deposited.
    -2 well-furnished, well- supplied, well-provided, well-arranged; सुविहितप्रयोगतया आर्यस्य न किमपि परिहास्यते Ś.1; कलहंसमकरन्दप्रेवशावसरे तत् सुविहितम् Māl.1.
    -3 well done or performed.
    -4 well satisfied (by hospitality); अन्नपानैः सुविहितास्तस्मिन् यज्ञे महात्मनः Rām.1.14.16.
    -वी(बी)ज a. having good seed.
    (-जः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 the poppy. (
    -जम्) good seed.
    -वीरकम् 1 a kind of collyrium.
    -2 sour gruel (काञ्जिक); सुवीरकं याच्यमाना मद्रिका कर्षति स्फिचौ Mb.8.4.38.
    -वीराम्लम् sour rice-gruel.
    -वीर्य a.
    1 having great vigour.
    -2 of heroic strength, heroic, chivalrous.
    (-र्यम्) 1 great heroism
    -2 abundance of heroes.
    -3 the fruit of the jujube. (
    -र्या) wild cotton.
    -वृक्तिः f.
    1 a pure offering.
    -2 a hymn of praise.
    -वृत्त a.
    1 well-behaved, virtuous, good; मयि तस्य सुवृत्त वर्तते लघुसंदेशपदा सरस्वती R. 8.77.
    -2 well-rounded, beautifully globular or round; मृदुनातिसुवृत्तेन सुमृष्टेनातिहारिणा । मोदकेनापि किं तेन निष्पत्तिर्यस्य सेवया ॥ or सुमुखो$पि सुवृत्तो$पि सन्मार्गपतितो$पि च । महतां पादलग्नो$पि व्यथयत्येव कष्टकः ॥ (where all the adjectives are used in a double sense). (
    -त्तम्) a good or virtuous conduct; भर्तुश्चिन्तानुवर्तित्वं सुवृत्तं चानुजीविनाम् Pt.1.69. (
    -त्ता) a sort of grape.
    -वेल a.
    1 tranquil, still.
    -2 humble, quiet. (
    -लः) N. of the Trikūṭa mountain.
    -व्रत a. strict in the observance of religious vows, strictly virtuous or religious. (
    -तः) a religious student.
    (-ता) 1 a virtuous wife.
    -2 a tractable cow, one easily milked.
    -शंस a. well spoken of, famous, glorious, commendable.
    -शक a. capable of being easily done.
    -शर्मन् (m., f.) a person desiring intercourse (Uṇ.4. 165].
    -शल्यः the Khadira tree.
    -शाकम् undried ginger.
    -शारदः N. of Śiva.
    -शासित a. kept under control, well-controlled.
    -शिक्षित a. well-taught, trained, well- disciplined.
    -शिखः fire.
    (-खा) 1 a peacock's crest.
    -2 a cock's comb.
    -शीतम् yellow sandal-wood.
    -शीम a. cold, frigid. (
    -मः) coldness
    -शील a. good-tempered, amiable.
    (-ला) 1 N. of the wife of Yama.
    -2 N. of one of the eight favourite wives of Kriṣṇa.
    -शेव a. full of happiness; pleasant to be resorted; एष पन्था उरुगायः मुशेवः Ait. Br.7.13.11.
    -शोण a. dark-red.
    -श्रीका the gum olibanum tree.
    -श्रुत a.
    1 well heard.
    -2 versed in the Vedas.
    -3 gladly heard (also an ex- clamation at a श्राद्ध); पित्रे स्वदितमित्येव वाच्यं गोष्ठे तु सुश्रुतम् Ms.3.254. (
    -तः) N. of the author of a system of medicine, whose work, together with that of Charaka, is regardad as the oldest medical authority, and held in great esteem in India even to this day.
    -श्लिष्ट a.
    1 well-arranged or united.
    -2 well-fitted; Māl.1.
    -श्लेषः close union or embrace.
    -श्लोक्य a. very famous; तेजीयसामपि ह्येतन्न सुश्लोक्यं जगद्गुरो Bhāg.3.12.31.
    -संवीत a.
    1 well-girt; स ददर्श ततः श्रीमान् सुग्रीवं हेमपिङ्गलम् । सुसंवीतम्... Rām.4.16.15.
    -2 well dressed.
    -संवृतिः good concealment. a. well-concealed; परितप्तो$प्यपरः सुसंवृतिः Śi.16.23.
    -संस्कृत a.
    1 well cooked or prepared.
    -2 kept in good order; सुसंस्कृतोपस्करया व्यये चामुक्तहस्तया Ms.5.15.
    -संगृहीत a.
    1 well controlled or governed; सुसंगृहीतराष्ट्रो हि पार्थिवः सुखमेधते Ms.7.113.
    -2 well received.
    -3 well kept.
    -4 well abridged.
    -संध a. true to a promise.
    -संनत a. well-directed (as an arrow).
    -सत्या N. of the wife of Janaka.
    -सदृश् a. agreeable to look at.
    -समाहित a.
    1 well arranged, beautifully adorned; very beautiful; ऋतुकालं प्रतीक्षन्ते नार्थिनः सुसमाहिते । संगमं त्वहमिच्छामि त्वया सह सुमध्यमे ॥ Rām.1.48.18.
    -2 completely loaded; तद्यथानः सुसमा- हितमुत्सर्जद्यायात् Bṛi. Up.4.3.35.
    -3 Very intent, attentive.
    -समीहित a. much desired.
    - सरण N. of Śiva.
    -सह a.
    1 easy to be borne.
    -2 bearing or enduring well. (
    -हः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -सहाय a. having a good companion; प्रणेतुं शक्यते दण्डः सुसहायेन धीमता Ms.7.31.
    -साधित a. well trained or educated.
    -सार a. having good sap or essence.
    (-रः) 1 good sap, essence, or substance.
    -2 competence.
    -3 the red-flowering Kha- dira tree.
    -सारवत् n. crystal.
    -सिकता 1 good sand.
    -2 gravel.
    -3 sugar.
    -सुरप्रिया jasmine.
    -सेव्य a. to be well or easily followed (as a road).
    -सौभगम् con- jugal felicity.
    -स्थ a.
    1 well-suited, being in a good sense.
    -2 in health, healthy, faring well.
    -3 in good or prosperous circumstances, prosperous.
    -4 happy, fortunate. (
    -स्थम्) a happy state, well-being; प्रह्लाद सुस्थरूपोसि पश्यन् व्यसनमात्मनः Mb.12.222.12; सुस्थे को वा न पण्डितः H.3.114.
    -स्थित a. in the same sense as सुस्थ. (
    -तम्) a house with a gallery on all sides.
    -स्थितिः (also सुस्थता) f.
    1 good condition, well-being, welfare, happiness.
    -2 health, convalescence.
    -स्थिर a.
    1 stable.
    -2 resolute, cool.
    -स्नातः 1 one who bathes at the end of a sacrifice; L. D. B.
    -2 well purified by bathing.
    -स्मित a. pleasantly smiling. (
    -ता) a woman with a pleased or smiling countenance.
    -स्वपनः an epithet of Śiva.
    -स्वर a.
    1 melodious, harmonious.
    -2 loud. ˚यन्त्रकम् a kind of musical instrument; युता सुस्वरयन्त्रकैः Śukra.1.247.
    -हित a.
    1 very fit or suitable, appro- priate.
    -2 beneficial, salutary.
    -3 friendly, affection- ate.
    -4 satisfied; सहस्रनेत्रः सुहितत्वमाप न Rām. ch.2.64. (
    -ता) one of the seven tongues of fire.
    -हृद् a. having a kind heart, cordial, friendly, loving, affectionate; सुहृदः सुहृदो$न्यांश्च दुर्हृदश्चापि दुर्हृदः । सम्यक्प्रवृत्तान् पुरुषान्नसम्यगनुपश्यतः ॥ Mb.3.28.36. (-m.)
    1 a friend; सुहृदः पश्य वसन्त किं स्थितम् Ku.4.27; मन्दायन्ते न खलु सुहृदामभ्युपेतार्थकृत्याः Me.4.
    -2 an ally. ˚भेदः
    1 the separation of friends.
    -2 N. of the 2nd book of the हितोपदेश; मित्रलाभः सुहृद्भेदो विग्रहः संधिरेव च । पञ्चतन्त्रात्तथान्यस्माद् ग्रन्थादाकृष्य लिख्यते ॥ H. Pr.9. ˚वाक्यम् the counsel of a friend.
    -हृदः a friend.
    -हृदय a.
    1 good-hearted.
    -2 dear, affectionate, loving.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > सु _su

  • 92 принимать

    принять
    1. (вн.; в разн. знач.) take* (d.)

    принимать лекарство — take* one's medicine

    принимать ванну — have / take* a bath

    порт может принимать океанские пароходы — the port can handle / take ocean-going vessels

    принимать присягу — take* the oath (of allegiance)

    принимать меры — take* measures, make* arrangements

    принимать участие (в пр.) — take* part (in), participate (in); partake* (in)

    принимать к сведению, принимать во внимание, принимать в расчёт — take* into consideration / account (d.)

    не принимать к сведению, не принимать во внимание — disregard (d.)

    принимая во внимание, что — taking into consideration / account that, considering that

    принимая что-л. во внимание — taking smth. into account / consideration

    принимать чью-л. сторону — take* the part of smb., side with smb.

    принимать что-л. в шутку — take* smth. as a joke

    принимать что-л. всерьёз — take* smth. seriously

    принимать что-л. на свой счёт — take* smth. as referring to oneself

    принимать на себя что-л. — take* smth. upon oneself; assume smth.

    принимать должность — accept, или take over, a post

    принимать командование (тв.) — assume / take* command (of, over)

    он принял российское гражданство — he became a Russian citizen, he took Russian citizenship

    принимать христианство, магометанство — adopt Christianity, Mohammedanism

    принимать монашество — take* monastic vows, become* a monk; ( о женщине) take* the veil

    2. (вн. в, на вн.; включать в состав) admit (d. to), accept (d. for)

    принимать новых членов (в вн.) — accept new members (for)

    принимать в партию — admit to / into the party (d.)

    принимать на работу — take* on (d.), give* employment (to)

    принимать в школу, институт — admit to school, to the institute (d.)

    3. (вн.; соглашаться на) accept (d.)

    принимать предложение — accept an offer; ( о браке) accept a proposal (of marriage)

    принимать вызов — accept the challenge; take* up the gauntlet идиом.

    принимать как должное — accept as one's due (d.); take* as a matter of course (d.)

    принимать резолюцию — pass / adopt / approve / carry a resolution

    4. (вн.; посетителей и т. п.) receive (d.)

    принимать гостей — receive guests / visitors

    принимать у себя кого-л. — play host to smb.

    он сегодня не принимает — he does not receive visitors today; ( о враче) he does not see patients today

    5. (вн.; приобретать) assume (d.)

    принимать форму чего-л. — take* the shape of smth.

    принимать вид — assume / affect an air, put* / take* on an air

    его болезнь приняла очень серьёзный характер — his illness assumed a grave character, или took on a very serious aspect

    6. (вн. за вн.) take* (d. for)

    он принял его за товарища Н. — he took him for Comrade N.

    7. (вн. от; брать в своё ведение) take* over (d. from)

    принимать дела от кого-л. — take* over somebody's duties, take* over duties from smb.

    8. (вн. за что-л.; считать) assume (d. to be smth.)
    9. об. несов. (у кого-л.; ребёнка при родах) deliver (smb.; of a child)

    Русско-английский словарь Смирнитского > принимать

  • 93 एव


    evá
    1) (in the Saṃhitā alsoﾠ evā́) ind. (i Uṇ. I, 152 ;

    fr. pronom. base e BRD., probably connected with 2. éva), so, just so, exactly so (in the sense of the later evam) RV. AV. ;
    indeed, truly, really (often at the beginning of a verse in conjunction with other particles, as id, hi) RV. ;
    (in its most frequent use of strengthening the idea expressed by any word,
    eva must be variously rendered by such adverbs as)
    just, exactly, very, same, only, even, alone, merely, immediately on, still, already, etc.
    (e.g.. tvamevayantānâ̱nyo'stipṛithivyām,
    thou alone art a charioteer, no other is on earth,
    i.e. thou art the best charioteer MBh. III, 2825 ;
    tāvatīmevarātrim, just so long as a night;
    evam eva orﾠ tathai ͡va, exactly so, in this manner only;
    in the same manner as above;
    tenai ͡vamantreṇa, with the same Mantra as above;
    apaḥspṛishṭvai ͡va, by merely touching water;
    tāneva, these very persons;
    nacirādeva, in no long time at all;
    japyenai ͡va, by sole repetition;
    abhuktvai ͡va, even without having eaten;
    itivadanneva, at the very moment of saying so;
    sajīvanneva, he while still living, etc.) RV. etc. MBh. etc.;
    (sometimes, esp. in connection with other adverbs, eva is a mere expletive without any exact meaning andﾠ not translatable e.g.. tveva, cai ͡va, evaca, etc.;
    according to native authorities eva implies emphasis, affirmation, detraction, diminution, command, restrainment);
    + cf. Zd. aeva;
    Goth. aiv;
    Old Germ. eo, io;
    Mod. Germ. je
    éva
    2) mfn. (i), going, moving, speedy, quick TBr. III Uṇ. ;

    m. course, way (generally instr. pl.) RV. ;
    the earth, world VS. XV, 4; 5; Mahīdh. ;
    a horse RV. I, 158, 3 < Sāy. >;
    (ās) m. pl. way orﾠ manner of acting orﾠ proceeding, conduct, habit, usage, custom RV. ;
    + cf. Gk. αἰές, αἰών;
    Lat. aevu-m;
    Goth. aivs;
    Old High Germ. êwa
    Angl. Sax. êu, êo, « custom», « law» ;
    Germ. ehe
    - एवया
    - एवयावन्

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > एव

  • 94 наведение

    aiming, ( на цель) directing рлк, guidance, guidance control, induction, laying радио, pointing, vector
    * * *
    наведе́ние с. ( управление полетом ЛА)
    guidance
    астроинерциа́льное наведе́ние — inertial-celestial guidance
    гиперболи́ческое наведе́ние — hyperbolic guidance
    наведе́ние для встре́чи на орби́те — rendezvous guidance
    инерциа́льное наведе́ние — inertial guidance
    интерферометри́ческое наведе́ние — interferometer [monopulse] guidance
    кома́ндное наведе́ние — command guidance
    магнитометри́ческое наведе́ние — magnetometric guidance
    наведе́ние на коне́чном уча́стке полё́та — terminal guidance
    наведе́ние на ма́ршевом уча́стке полё́та — mid-course guidance
    наведе́ние на ста́ртовом уча́стке — launch guidance
    опти́ческое наведе́ние — optical guidance
    наведе́ние по геофизи́ческим пара́метрам — terrestrial-reference guidance
    наведе́ние по земны́м ориенти́рам — terrestrial(-reference) guidance
    наведе́ние по ла́зерному лучу́ — laser guidance
    наведе́ние по лучу́ — beam guidance
    наведе́ние при захо́де на поса́дку — approach guidance
    наведе́ние при стыко́вке — docking guidance
    радиоинерциа́льное наведе́ние — radioinertial guidance
    радиолокацио́нное наведе́ние — radar guidance
    наведе́ние с земли́ — earth-based guidance

    Русско-английский политехнический словарь > наведение

  • 95 принимать

    несов. - принима́ть, сов. - приня́ть
    1) (вн.; брать предлагаемое, подаваемое) accept (d); take (d)

    принима́ть пода́рок — accept a present ['prez-]

    принима́ть заявле́ние — accept an application

    2) (вн. от; брать в своё ведение) take over (d from)

    принима́ть дела́ от кого́-л — take over smb's duties, take over from smb

    принима́ть това́р — accept goods

    принима́ть под распи́ску — sign (for)

    принима́ть до́лжность — accept [take over] a post

    принима́ть кома́ндование (тв.) — assume / take command (of, over)

    принима́ть на себя́ что-л — take smth upon oneself; assume smth

    принима́ть на себя́ ли́чно управле́ние (тв.) — take personal control (of)

    3) (вн. в, на вн.; включать в состав) admit (d to), accept (d for)

    принима́ть но́вых чле́нов (в вн.) — accept new members (for)

    принима́ть в па́ртию — admit (d) to / into the party

    принима́ть на рабо́ту — take on (d), hire (d), employ (d)

    принима́ть в шко́лу [институ́т] — admit to school [to the institute] (d)

    4) (вн.; посетителей и т.п.) receive (d)

    принима́ть госте́й — receive guests / visitors [-z-]

    принима́ть у себя́ кого́-л — play host [həʊst] to smb

    принима́ть раду́шно — welcome (d)

    он сего́дня не принима́ет — he does not receive visitors today; ( о враче) he does not see patients today

    5) (вн.; соглашаться на что-л) accept (d)

    принима́ть предложе́ние — accept an offer; ( о браке) accept a proposal [-z-] (of marriage)

    принима́ть вы́зов — accept the challenge; take up the gauntlet идиом.

    принима́ть бой — accept battle

    принима́ть как до́лжное — accept as one's due (d); take (d) as a matter of course

    6) (вн.; официально утверждать) adopt (d); approve (d)

    принима́ть резолю́цию — pass / adopt / approve [-ruːv] / carry a resolution

    принима́ть зако́н — pass a law

    принима́ть законопрое́кт — approve a bill

    7) (вн.; провозглашать от своего имени) take (d)

    принима́ть прися́гу — take the oath (of allegiance)

    принима́ть заявле́ние — make / issue a statement

    8) (вн.; приобретать какие-л свойства) assume (d)

    принима́ть фо́рму чего́-л — take / assume the shape of smth

    принима́ть вид — assume / affect an air, put / take on an air

    принима́ть ожесточённый хара́ктер — become fierce [fɪəs]

    его́ боле́знь приняла́ о́чень серьёзный хара́ктер — his illness assumed [took on] a grave character

    де́ло при́няло неожи́данный оборо́т — the affair took an unexpected turn

    9) (вн.; гражданство, учение, религию и т.п.) adopt (d)

    принима́ть христиа́нство [мусульма́нство] — adopt Christianity [Islam]

    принима́ть креще́ние — be baptized

    принима́ть мона́шество — take monastic vows, become a monk [mʌŋk]; ( о женщине) take the veil

    принима́ть росси́йское гражда́нство — become a Russian citizen, take Russian citizenship

    10) (вн. за вн.; считать кем-л, чем-л) take (d for)

    он при́нял его́ за друго́го — he (mis)took him for another person

    за кого́ вы меня́ принима́ете? — who do you take me for?

    11) (вн.; воспринимать, реагировать) take (d)

    принима́ть (бли́зко) к се́рдцу — take / lay to heart (d)

    не принима́йте э́того (бли́зко) к се́рдцу — don't take it to heart

    принима́ть что-л в шу́тку — take smth as a joke

    принима́ть что-л всерьёз — take smth seriously

    12) (вн.; употреблять) take (d)

    принима́ть пи́щу — take food, eat

    принима́ть лека́рство — take one's medicine

    13) разг. (вн.; выпивать) drink (d), tipple (d)
    14) (вн. у; ребёнка при родах) deliver [-'lɪ-] (smb of a child)

    принима́ть вле́во [впра́во] — move left [right]

    принима́ть наза́д — move backward (a little); back up

    16) (вн.; образует устойчивые выражения с рядом сущ.)

    принима́ть ва́нну [душ] — have / take a bath [shower]

    принима́ть ме́ры — take measures

    принима́ть ме́ры предосторо́жности — take precautions

    принима́ть уча́стие (в пр.) — take part (in), participate (in); partake (in)

    принима́ть реше́ние — decide; take [make ; come to; reach] a decision

    ••

    так при́нято — см. принято

    прими́те моё уваже́ние (в письме) — yours respectfully

    принима́ть к све́дению [во внима́ние, в расчёт] — take (d) into consideration / account

    не принима́ть к све́дению [во внима́ние] — disregard (d)

    не принима́ть в расчёт — discount (d)

    принима́я во внима́ние, что — with due account taken of the fact that, considering that

    принима́ть чью-л сто́рону — take the part of smb, side with smb

    принима́ть на свой счёт — take smth as referring to oneself

    Новый большой русско-английский словарь > принимать

  • 96 ab

    ăb, ā, abs, prep. with abl. This IndoEuropean particle (Sanscr. apa or ava, Etr. av, Gr. upo, Goth. af, Old Germ. aba, New Germ. ab, Engl. of, off) has in Latin the following forms: ap, af, ab (av), au-, a, a; aps, abs, as-. The existence of the oldest form, ap, is proved by the oldest and best MSS. analogous to the prep. apud, the Sanscr. api, and Gr. epi, and by the weakened form af, which, by the rule of historical grammar and the nature of the Latin letter f, can be derived only from ap, not from ab. The form af, weakened from ap, also very soon became obsolete. There are but five examples of it in inscriptions, at the end of the sixth and in the course of the seventh century B. C., viz.:

    AF VOBEIS,

    Inscr. Orell. 3114;

    AF MVRO,

    ib. 6601;

    AF CAPVA,

    ib. 3308;

    AF SOLO,

    ib. 589;

    AF LYCO,

    ib. 3036 ( afuolunt =avolant, Paul. ex Fest. p. 26 Mull., is only a conjecture). In the time of Cicero this form was regarded as archaic, and only here and there used in account-books; v. Cic. Or. 47, 158 (where the correct reading is af, not abs or ab), and cf. Ritschl, Monum. Epigr. p. 7 sq.—The second form of this preposition, changed from ap, was ab, which has become the principal form and the one most generally used through all periods—and indeed the only oue used before all vowels and h; here and there also before some consonants, particularly l, n, r, and s; rarely before c, j, d, t; and almost never before the labials p, b, f, v, or before m, such examples as ab Massiliensibus, Caes. B. C. 1, 35, being of the most rare occurrence.—By changing the b of ab through v into u, the form au originated, which was in use only in the two compounds aufero and aufugio for abfero, ab-fugio; aufuisse for afuisse, in Cod. Medic. of Tac. A. 12, 17, is altogether unusual. Finally, by dropping the b of ab, and lengthening the a, ab was changed into a, which form, together with ab, predominated through all periods of the Latin language, and took its place before all consonants in the later years of Cicero, and after him almoet exclusively.—By dropping the b without lengthening the a, ab occurs in the form a- in the two compounds a-bio and a-perio, q. v.—On the other hand, instead of reducing ap to a and a, a strengthened collateral form, aps, was made by adding to ap the letter s (also used in particles, as in ex, mox, vix). From the first, aps was used only before the letters c, q, t, and was very soon changed into abs (as ap into ab):

    abs chorago,

    Plaut. Pers. 1, 3, 79 (159 Ritschl):

    abs quivis,

    Ter. Ad. 2, 3, 1:

    abs terra,

    Cato, R. R. 51;

    and in compounds: aps-cessero,

    Plaut. Trin. 3, 1, 24 (625 R.); id. ib. 3, 2, 84 (710 R): abs-condo, abs-que, abs-tineo, etc. The use of abs was confined almost exclusively to the combination abs te during the whole ante-classic period, and with Cicero till about the year 700 A. U. C. (=B. C. 54). After that time Cicero evidently hesitates between abs te and a te, but during the last five or six years of his life a te became predominant in all his writings, even in his letters; consequently abs te appears but rarely in later authors, as in Liv. 10, 19, 8; 26, 15, 12;

    and who, perhaps, also used abs conscendentibus,

    id. 28, 37, 2; v. Drakenb. ad. h. l. (Weissenb. ab).—Finally abs, in consequence of the following p, lost its b, and became ds- in the three compounds aspello, as-porto, and as-pernor (for asspernor); v. these words.—The late Lat. verb abbrevio may stand for adbrevio, the d of ad being assimilated to the following b.The fundamental signification of ab is departure from some fixed point (opp. to ad. which denotes motion to a point).
    I.
    In space, and,
    II.
    Fig., in time and other relations, in which the idea of departure from some point, as from source and origin, is included; Engl. from, away from, out of; down from; since, after; by, at, in, on, etc.
    I.
    Lit., in space: ab classe ad urbem tendunt, Att. ap. Non. 495, 22 (Trag. Rel. p. 177 Rib.):

    Caesar maturat ab urbe proficisci,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 7:

    fuga ab urbe turpissima,

    Cic. Att. 7, 21:

    ducite ab urbe domum, ducite Daphnim,

    Verg. E. 8, 68. Cicero himself gives the difference between ab and ex thus: si qui mihi praesto fuerit cum armatis hominibus extra meum fundum et me introire prohibuerit, non ex eo, sed ab ( from, away from) eo loco me dejecerit....Unde dejecti Galli? A Capitolio. Unde, qui cum Graccho fucrunt? Ex Capitolio, etc., Cic. Caecin. 30, 87; cf. Diom. p. 408 P., and a similar distinction between ad and in under ad.—Ellipt.: Diogenes Alexandro roganti, ut diceret, si quid opus esset: Nunc quidem paululum, inquit, a sole, a little out of the sun, Cic. Tusc. 5, 32, 92. —Often joined with usque:

    illam (mulierem) usque a mari supero Romam proficisci,

    all the way from, Cic. Clu. 68, 192; v. usque, I.—And with ad, to denote the space passed over: siderum genus ab ortu ad occasum commeant, from... to, Cic. N. D. 2, 19 init.; cf. ab... in:

    venti a laevo latere in dextrum, ut sol, ambiunt,

    Plin. 2, 47, 48, § 128.
    b.
    Sometimes with names of cities and small islands, or with domus (instead of the usual abl.), partie., in militnry and nautieal language, to denote the marching of soldiers, the setting out of a flcet, or the departure of the inhabitants from some place:

    oppidum ab Aenea fugiente a Troja conditum,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 33:

    quemadmodum (Caesar) a Gergovia discederet,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 43 fin.; so id. ib. 7, 80 fin.; Sall. J. 61; 82; 91; Liv. 2, 33, 6 al.; cf.:

    ab Arimino M. Antonium cum cohortibus quinque Arretium mittit,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 11 fin.; and:

    protinus a Corfinio in Siciliam miserat,

    id. ib. 1, 25, 2:

    profecti a domo,

    Liv. 40, 33, 2;

    of setting sail: cum exercitus vestri numquam a Brundisio nisi hieme summa transmiserint,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 12, 32; so id. Fam. 15, 3, 2; Caes. B. C. 3, 23; 3, 24 fin.:

    classe qua advecti ab domo fuerant,

    Liv. 8, 22, 6;

    of citizens: interim ab Roma legatos venisse nuntiatum est,

    Liv. 21, 9, 3; cf.:

    legati ab Orico ad M. Valerium praetorem venerunt,

    id. 24, 40, 2.
    c.
    Sometimes with names of persons or with pronouns: pestem abige a me, Enn. ap. Cic. Ac. 2, 28, 89 (Trag. v. 50 Vahl.):

    Quasi ad adulescentem a patre ex Seleucia veniat,

    Plaut. Trin. 3, 3, 41; cf.:

    libertus a Fuflis cum litteris ad Hermippum venit,

    Cic. Fl. 20, 47:

    Nigidium a Domitio Capuam venisse,

    id. Att. 7, 24:

    cum a vobis discessero,

    id. Sen. 22:

    multa merces tibi defluat ab Jove Neptunoque,

    Hor. C. 1, 28, 29 al. So often of a person instead of his house, lodging, etc.: videat forte hic te a patre aliquis exiens, from the father, i. e. from his house, Ter. Heaut. 2, 2, 6:

    so a fratre,

    id. Phorm. 5, 1, 5:

    a Pontio,

    Cic. Att. 5, 3 fin.:

    ab ea,

    Ter. And. 1, 3, 21; and so often: a me, a nobis, a se, etc., from my, our, his house, etc., Plaut. Stich. 5, 1, 7; Ter. Heaut. 3, 2, 50; Cic. Att. 4, 9, 1 al.
    B.
    Transf., without the idea of motion. To designate separation or distance, with the verbs abesse, distare, etc., and with the particles longe, procul, prope, etc.
    1.
    Of separation:

    ego te afuisse tam diu a nobis dolui,

    Cic. Fam. 2, 1, 2:

    abesse a domo paulisper maluit,

    id. Verr. 2, 4, 18, § 39:

    tum Brutus ab Roma aberat,

    Sall. C. 40, 5:

    absint lacerti ab stabulis,

    Verg. G. 4, 14.—
    2.
    Of distance:

    quot milia fundus suus abesset ab urbe,

    Cic. Caecin. 10, 28; cf.:

    nos in castra properabamus, quae aberant bidui,

    id. Att. 5, 16 fin.; and:

    hic locus aequo fere spatio ab castris Ariovisti et Caesaris aberat,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 43, 1:

    terrae ab hujusce terrae, quam nos incolimus, continuatione distantes,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 66, 164:

    non amplius pedum milibus duobus ab castris castra distabant,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 82, 3; cf. id. lb. 1, 3, 103.—With adverbs: annos multos longinque ab domo bellum gerentes, Enn. ap. Non. 402, 3 (Trag. v. 103 Vahl.):

    cum domus patris a foro longe abesset,

    Cic. Cael. 7, 18 fin.; cf.:

    qui fontes a quibusdam praesidiis aberant longius,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 49, 5:

    quae procul erant a conspectu imperii,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 32, 87; cf.:

    procul a castris hostes in collibus constiterunt,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 17, 1; and:

    tu procul a patria Alpinas nives vides,

    Verg. E. 10, 46 (procul often also with simple abl.;

    v. procul): cum esset in Italia bellum tam prope a Sicilia, tamen in Sicilia non fuit,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 2, § 6; cf.:

    tu apud socrum tuam prope a meis aedibus sedebas,

    id. Pis. 11, 26; and:

    tam prope ab domo detineri,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 3, § 6.—So in Caesar and Livy, with numerals to designate the measure of the distance:

    onerariae naves, quae ex eo loco ab milibus passuum octo vento tenebatur,

    eight miles distant, Caes. B. G. 4, 22, 4; and without mentioning the terminus a quo: ad castra contenderunt, et ab milibus passunm minus duobus castra posuerunt, less than two miles off or distant, id. ib. 2, 7, 3; so id. ib. 2, 5, 32; 6, 7, 3; id. B. C. 1, 65; Liv. 38, 20, 2 (for which:

    duo milia fere et quingentos passus ab hoste posuerunt castra,

    id. 37, 38, 5). —
    3.
    To denote the side or direction from which an object is viewed in its local relations,=a parte, at, on, in: utrum hacin feriam an ab laeva latus? Enn. ap. Plaut. Cist. 3, 10 (Trag. v. 38 Vahl.); cf.:

    picus et cornix ab laeva, corvos, parra ab dextera consuadent,

    Plaut. As. 2, 1, 12: clamore ab ea parte audito. on this side, Caes. B. G. 3, 26, 4: Gallia Celtica attingit ab Sequanis et Helvetiis flumen Rhenum, on the side of the Sequani, i. e. their country, id. ib. 1, 1, 5:

    pleraque Alpium ab Italia sicut breviora ita arrectiora sunt,

    on the Italian side, Liv. 21, 35, 11:

    non eadem diligentia ab decumuna porta castra munita,

    at the main entrance, Caes. B. G. 3, 25 fin.:

    erat a septentrionibus collis,

    on the north, id. ib. 7, 83, 2; so, ab oriente, a meridie, ab occasu; a fronte, a latere, a tergo, etc. (v. these words).
    II.
    Fig.
    A.
    In time.
    1.
    From a [p. 3] point of time, without reference to the period subsequently elapsed. After:

    Exul ab octava Marius bibit,

    Juv. 1,40:

    mulieres jam ab re divin[adot ] adparebunt domi,

    immediately after the sucrifice, Plaut. Poen. 3, 3, 4:

    Caesar ab decimae legionis cohortatione ad dextrum cornu profectus,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 25, 1:

    ab hac contione legati missi sunt,

    immediately after, Liv. 24, 22, 6; cf. id. 28, 33, 1; 40, 47, 8; 40, 49, 1 al.:

    ab eo magistratu,

    after this office, Sall. J. 63, 5:

    a summa spe novissima exspectabat,

    after the greatest hope, Tac. A. 6, 50 fin. —Strengthened by the adverbs primum, confestim, statim, protinus, or the adj. recens, immediately after, soon after:

    ut primum a tuo digressu Romam veni,

    Cic. Att. 1, 5, 4; so Suet. Tib. 68:

    confestim a proelio expugnatis hostium castris,

    Liv. 30, 36, 1:

    statim a funere,

    Suet. Caes. 85;

    and followed by statim: ab itinere statim,

    id. ib. 60:

    protinus ab adoptione,

    Vell. 2, 104, 3:

    Homerus qui recens ab illorum actate fuit,

    soon after their time, Cic. N. D. 3, 5; so Varr. R. R. 2, 8, 2; Verg. A. 6, 450 al. (v. also primum, confestim, etc.).—

    Sometimes with the name of a person or place, instead of an action: ibi mihi tuae litterae binae redditae sunt tertio abs te die,

    i. e. after their departure from you, Cic. Att. 5, 3, 1: in Italiam perventum est quinto mense a Carthagine Nov[adot ], i. e. after leaving (=postquam a Carthagine profecti sunt), Liv. 21, 38, 1:

    secundo Punico (bello) Scipionis classis XL. die a securi navigavit,

    i. e. after its having been built, Plin. 16, 39, 74, § 192. —Hence the poct. expression: ab his, after this (cf. ek toutôn), i. e. after these words, hereupon, Ov. M. 3, 273; 4, 329; 8, 612; 9, 764.
    2.
    With reference to a subsequent period. From, since, after:

    ab hora tertia bibebatur,

    from the third hour, Cic. Phil. 2, 41:

    infinito ex tempore, non ut antea, ab Sulla et Pompeio consulibus,

    since the consulship of, id. Agr. 2, 21, 56:

    vixit ab omni aeternitate,

    from all eternity, id. Div. 1, 51, 115:

    cum quo a condiscipulatu vivebat conjunctissime,

    Nep. Att. 5, 3:

    in Lycia semper a terrae motu XL. dies serenos esse,

    after an earthquake, Plin. 2, 96, 98, § 211 al.:

    centesima lux est haec ab interitu P. Clodii,

    since the death of, Cic. Mil. 35, 98; cf.:

    cujus a morte quintus hic et tricesimus annus est,

    id. Sen. 6, 19; and:

    ab incenso Capitolio illum esse vigesumiun annum,

    since, Sall. C. 47, 2:

    diebus triginta, a qua die materia caesa est,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 36.—Sometimes joined with usque and inde:

    quod augures omnes usque ab Romulo decreverunt,

    since the time of, Cic. Vat. 8, 20:

    jam inde ab infelici pugna ceciderant animi,

    from the very beginning of, Liv. 2, 65 fin. —Hence the adverbial expressions ab initio, a principio, a primo, at, in, or from the beginning, at first; v. initium, principium, primus. Likewise ab integro, anew, afresh; v. integer.—Ab... ad, from (a time)... to:

    ab hora octava ad vesperum secreto collocuti sumus,

    Cic. Att. 7, 8, 4; cf.:

    cum ab hora septima ad vesperum pugnatum sit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 26, 2; and:

    a quo tempore ad vos consules anni sunt septingenti octoginta unus,

    Vell. 1, 8, 4; and so in Plautus strengthened by usque:

    pugnata pugnast usque a mane ad vesperum,

    from morning to evening, Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 97; id. Most. 3, 1, 3; 3, 2, 80.—Rarely ab... in: Romani ab sole orto in multum diei stetere in acie, from... till late in the day, Liv. 27, 2, 9; so Col. 2, 10, 17; Plin. 2, 31, 31, § 99; 2, 103, 106, § 229; 4, 12, 26, § 89.
    b.
    Particularly with nouns denoting a time of life:

    qui homo cum animo inde ab ineunte aetate depugnat suo,

    from an early age, from early youth, Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 24; so Cic. Off. 2, 13, 44 al.:

    mihi magna cum co jam inde a pueritia fuit semper famillaritas,

    Ter. Heaut. 1, 2, 9; so,

    a pueritia,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 11, 27 fin.; id. Fam. 5, 8, 4:

    jam inde ab adulescentia,

    Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 16:

    ab adulescentia,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 1:

    jam a prima adulescentia,

    id. Fam. 1, 9, 23:

    ab ineunte adulescentia,

    id. ib. 13, 21, 1; cf.

    followed by ad: usque ad hanc aetatem ab incunte adulescentia,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 20:

    a primis temporibus aetatis,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 3, 3:

    a teneris unguiculis,

    from childhood, id. ib. 1, 6, 2:

    usque a toga pura,

    id. Att. 7, 8, 5:

    jam inde ab incunabulis,

    Liv. 4, 36, 5:

    a prima lanugine,

    Suet. Oth. 12:

    viridi ab aevo,

    Ov. Tr. 4, 10, 17 al.;

    rarely of animals: ab infantia,

    Plin. 10, 63, 83, § 182.—Instead of the nom. abstr. very often (like the Greek ek paioôn, etc.) with concrete substantives: a pucro, ab adulescente, a parvis, etc., from childhood, etc.:

    qui olim a puero parvulo mihi paedagogus fuerat,

    Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 90; so,

    a pausillo puero,

    id. Stich. 1, 3, 21:

    a puero,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 36, 115; id. Fam. 13, 16, 4 (twice) al.:

    a pueris,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 24, 57; id. de Or. 1, 1, 2 al.:

    ab adulescente,

    id. Quint. 3, 12:

    ab infante,

    Col. 1, 8, 2:

    a parva virgine,

    Cat. 66, 26 al. —Likewise and in the same sense with adject.: a parvo, from a little child, or childhood, Liv. 1, 39, 6 fin.; cf.:

    a parvis,

    Ter. And. 3, 3, 7; Cic. Leg. 2, 4, 9:

    a parvulo,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 8; id. Ad. 1, 1, 23; cf.:

    ab parvulis,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 21, 3:

    ab tenero,

    Col. 5, 6, 20;

    and rarely of animals: (vacca) a bima aut trima fructum ferre incipit,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 1, 13.
    B.
    In other relations in which the idea of going forth, proceeding, from something is included.
    1.
    In gen. to denote departure, separation, deterring, avoiding, intermitting, etc., or distance, difference, etc., of inanimate or abstract things. From: jus atque aecum se a malis spernit procul, Enn. ap. Non. 399, 10 (Trag. v. 224 Vahl.):

    suspitionem et culpam ut ab se segregent,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 42:

    qui discessum animi a corpore putent esse mortem,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 9, 18:

    hic ab artificio suo non recessit,

    id. ib. 1, 10, 20 al.:

    quod si exquiratur usque ab stirpe auctoritas,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 180:

    condicionem quam ab te peto,

    id. ib. 2, 4, 87; cf.:

    mercedem gloriae flagitas ab iis, quorum, etc.,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 15, 34:

    si quid ab illo acceperis,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 90:

    quae (i. e. antiquitas) quo propius aberat ab ortu et divina progenie,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 12, 26:

    ab defensione desistere,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 12, 4:

    ne quod tempus ab opere intermitteretur,

    id. B. G. 7, 24, 2:

    ut homines adulescentis a dicendi studio deterream,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 25, 117, etc.—Of distance (in order, rank, mind, or feeling):

    qui quartus ab Arcesila fuit,

    the fourth in succession from, Cic. Ac. 1, 12, 46:

    tu nunc eris alter ab illo,

    next after him, Verg. E. 5, 49; cf.:

    Aiax, heros ab Achille secundus,

    next in rank to, Hor. S. 2, 3, 193:

    quid hoc ab illo differt,

    from, Cic. Caecin. 14, 39; cf.:

    hominum vita tantum distat a victu et cultu bestiarum,

    id. Off. 2, 4, 15; and:

    discrepare ab aequitate sapientiam,

    id. Rep. 3, 9 fin. (v. the verbs differo, disto, discrepo, dissideo, dissentio, etc.):

    quae non aliena esse ducerem a dignitate,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 7:

    alieno a te animo fuit,

    id. Deiot. 9, 24 (v. alienus). —So the expression ab re (qs. aside from the matter, profit; cf. the opposite, in rem), contrary to one's profit, to a loss, disadvantageous (so in the affirmative very rare and only ante-class.):

    subdole ab re consulit,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 1, 12; cf. id. Capt. 2, 2, 88; more frequently and class. (but not with Cicero) in the negative, non, haud, ab re, not without advantage or profit, not useless or unprofitable, adcantageous:

    haut est ab re aucupis,

    Plaut. As. 1, 3, 71:

    non ab re esse Quinctii visum est,

    Liv. 35, 32, 6; so Plin. 27, 8, 35; 31, 3, 26; Suet. Aug. 94; id. Dom. 11; Gell. 18, 14 fin.; App. Dogm. Plat. 3, p. 31, 22 al. (but in Ter. Ad. 5, 3, 44, ab re means with respect to the money matter).
    2.
    In partic.
    a.
    To denote an agent from whom an action proceeds, or by whom a thing is done or takes place. By, and in archaic and solemn style, of. So most frequently with pass. or intrans. verbs with pass. signif., when the active object is or is considered as a living being: Laudari me abs te, a laudato viro, Naev. ap. Cic. Tusc. 4, 31, 67: injuria abs te afficior, Enn. ap. Auct. Her. 2, 24, 38:

    a patre deductus ad Scaevolam,

    Cic. Lael. 1, 1:

    ut tamquam a praesentibus coram haberi sermo videretur,

    id. ib. 1, 3:

    disputata ab eo,

    id. ib. 1, 4 al.:

    illa (i. e. numerorum ac vocum vis) maxime a Graecia vetere celebrata,

    id. de Or. 3, 51, 197:

    ita generati a natura sumus,

    id. Off. 1, 29, 103; cf.:

    pars mundi damnata a rerum natura,

    Plin. 4, 12, 26, § 88:

    niagna adhibita cura est a providentia deorum,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 51 al. —With intrans. verbs:

    quae (i. e. anima) calescit ab eo spiritu,

    is warmed by this breath, Cic. N. D. 2, 55, 138; cf. Ov. M. 1, 417: (mare) qua a sole collucet, Cic. Ac. 2, 105:

    salvebis a meo Cicerone,

    i. e. young Cicero sends his compliments to you, id. Att. 6, 2 fin.:

    a quibus (Atheniensibus) erat profectus,

    i. e. by whose command, Nep. Milt. 2, 3:

    ne vir ab hoste cadat,

    Ov. H. 9, 36 al. —A substantive or adjective often takes the place of the verb (so with de, q. v.):

    levior est plaga ab amico quam a debitore,

    Cic. Fam. 9, 16, 7; cf.:

    a bestiis ictus, morsus, impetus,

    id. Off. 2, 6, 19:

    si calor est a sole,

    id. N. D. 2, 52:

    ex iis a te verbis (for a te scriptis),

    id. Att. 16, 7, 5:

    metu poenae a Romanis,

    Liv. 32, 23, 9:

    bellum ingens a Volscis et Aequis,

    id. 3, 22, 2:

    ad exsolvendam fldem a consule,

    id. 27, 5, 6.—With an adj.:

    lassus ab equo indomito,

    Hor. S. 2, 2, 10:

    Murus ab ingenic notior ille tuo,

    Prop. 5, 1, 126:

    tempus a nostris triste malis,

    time made sad by our misfortunes, Ov. Tr. 4, 3, 36.—Different from per:

    vulgo occidebantur: per quos et a quibus?

    by whom and upon whose orders? Cic. Rosc. Am. 29, 80 (cf. id. ib. 34, 97: cujus consilio occisus sit, invenio; cujus manu sit percussus, non laboro); so,

    ab hoc destitutus per Thrasybulum (i. e. Thrasybulo auctore),

    Nep. Alc. 5, 4.—Ambiguity sometimes arises from the fact that the verb in the pass. would require ab if used in the active:

    si postulatur a populo,

    if the people demand it, Cic. Off. 2, 17, 58, might also mean, if it is required of the people; on the contrary: quod ab eo (Lucullo) laus imperatoria non admodum exspectabatur, not since he did not expect military renown, but since they did not expect military renown from him, Cic. Ac. 2, 1, 2, and so often; cf. Rudd. II. p. 213. (The use of the active dative, or dative of the agent, instead of ab with the pass., is well known, Zumpt, § 419. It is very seldom found in prose writers of the golden age of Roman liter.; with Cic. sometimes joined with the participles auditus, cognitus, constitutus, perspectus, provisus, susceptus; cf. Halm ad Cic. Imp. Pomp. 24, 71, and ad ejusdem, Cat. 1, 7 fin.; but freq. at a later period; e. g. in Pliny, in Books 2-4 of H. N., more than twenty times; and likewise in Tacitus seventeen times. Vid. the passages in Nipperd. ad Tac. A. 2, 49.) Far more unusual is the simple abl. in the designation of persons:

    deseror conjuge,

    Ov. H. 12, 161; so id. ib. 5, 75; id. M. 1, 747; Verg. A. 1, 274; Hor. C. 2, 4, 9; 1, 6, 2;

    and in prose,

    Quint. 3, 4, 2; Sen. Contr. 2, 1; Curt. 6, 7, 8; cf. Rudd. II. p. 212; Zumpt ad Quint. V. p. 122 Spalding.—Hence the adverbial phrase a se=uph heautou, sua sponte, of one's own uccord, spontaneously:

    ipsum a se oritur et sua sponte nascitur,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 24, 78:

    (urna) ab se cantat quoja sit,

    Plaut. Rud. 2, 5, 21 (al. eapse; cf. id. Men. 1, 2, 66); so Col. 11, 1, 5; Liv. 44, 33, 6.
    b.
    With names of towns to denote origin, extraction, instead of gentile adjectives. From, of:

    pastores a Pergamide,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 1:

    Turnus ab Aricia,

    Liv. 1, 50, 3 (for which Aricinus, id. 1, 51, 1):

    obsides dant trecentos principum a Cora atque Pometia liberos,

    Liv. 2, 22, 2; and poet.: O longa mundi servator ab Alba, Auguste, thou who art descended from the old Alban race of kings (=oriundus, or ortus regibus Albanis), Prop. 5, 6, 37.
    c.
    In giving the etymology of a name: eam rem (sc. legem, Gr. nomon) illi Graeco putant nomine a suum cuique tribuendo appellatam, ego nostro a legendo, Cic. Leg. 1, 6, 19: annum intervallum regni fuit: id ab re... interregnum appellatum, Liv. 1, 17, 6:

    (sinus maris) ab nomine propinquae urbis Ambracius appellatus,

    id. 38, 4, 3; and so Varro in his Ling. Lat., and Pliny, in Books 1-5 of H. N., on almost every page. (Cf. also the arts. ex and de.)
    d.
    With verbs of beginning and repeating: a summo bibere, in Plaut. to drink in succession from the one at the head of the table:

    da, puere, ab summo,

    Plaut. As. 5, 2, 41; so,

    da ab Delphio cantharum circum, id Most. 1, 4, 33: ab eo nobis causa ordienda est potissimum,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 7, 21:

    coepere a fame mala,

    Liv. 4, 12, 7:

    cornicem a cauda de ovo exire,

    tail-foremost, Plin. 10, 16, 18:

    a capite repetis, quod quaerimus,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 6, 18 al.
    e.
    With verbs of freeing from, defending, or protecting against any thing:

    a foliis et stercore purgato,

    Cato, R. R. 65 (66), 1:

    tantumne ab re tuast oti tibi?

    Ter. Heaut. 1, [p. 4] 1, 23; cf.:

    Saguntini ut a proeliis quietem habuerant,

    Liv. 21, 11, 5:

    expiandum forum ab illis nefarii sceleris vestigiis,

    Cic. Rab. Perd. 4, 11:

    haec provincia non modo a calamitate, sed etiam a metu calamitatis est defendenda,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 6, 14 (v. defendo):

    ab incendio urbem vigiliis munitam intellegebat,

    Sall. C. 32:

    ut neque sustinere se a lapsu possent,

    Liv. 21, 35, 12:

    ut meam domum metueret atque a me ipso caveret,

    Cic. Sest. 64, 133.
    f.
    With verbs of expecting, fearing, hoping, and the like, ab =a parte, as, Cic. Att. 9, 7, 4: cum eadem metuam ab hac parte, since I fear the same from this side; hence, timere, metuere ab aliquo, not, to be afraid of any one, but, to fear something (proceeding from) from him:

    el metul a Chryside,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 79; cf.:

    ab Hannibale metuens,

    Liv. 23, 36; and:

    metus a praetore,

    id. 23, 15, 7;

    v. Weissenb. ad h. l.: a quo quidem genere, judices, ego numquam timui,

    Cic. Sull. 20, 59:

    postquam nec ab Romanis robis ulla est spes,

    you can expect nothing from the Romans, Liv. 21, 13, 4.
    g.
    With verbs of fastening and holding:

    funiculus a puppi religatus,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 51, 154:

    cum sinistra capillum ejus a vertice teneret,

    Q. Cic. Pet. Cons. 3.
    h.
    Ulcisci se ab aliquo, to take vengeance on one:

    a ferro sanguis humanus se ulciscitur,

    Plin. 34, 14, 41 fin.
    i.
    Cognoscere ab aliqua re to knoio or learn by means of something (different from ab aliquo, to learn from some one):

    id se a Gallicis armis atque insignibus cognovisse,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 22.
    j.
    Dolere, laborare, valere ab, instead of the simple abl.:

    doleo ab animo, doleo ab oculis, doleo ab aegritudine,

    Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 62:

    a morbo valui, ab animo aeger fui,

    id. Ep. 1, 2, 26; cf. id. Aul. 2, 2, 9:

    a frigore et aestu ne quid laborent,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 17; so,

    a frigore laborantibus,

    Plin. 32, 10, 46, § 133; cf.:

    laborare ab re frumentaria,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 10, 1; id. B. C. 3, 9; v. laboro.
    k.
    Where verbs and adjectives are joined with ab, instead of the simple abl., ab defines more exactly the respect in which that which is expressed by the verb or adj. is to be understood, in relation to, with regard to, in respect to, on the part of:

    ab ingenio improbus,

    Plaut. Truc. 4, 3, 59:

    a me pudica'st,

    id. Curc. 1, 1, 51:

    orba ab optimatibus contio,

    Cic. Fl. 23, 54; ro Ov. H. 6,156: securos vos ab hac parte reddemus, Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 24 fin. (v. securus):

    locus copiosus a frumento,

    Cic. Att. 5, 18, 2; cf.:

    sumus imparati cum a militibas tum a pecunia,

    id. ib. 7, 15 fin.:

    ille Graecus ab omni laude felicior,

    id. Brut. 16, 63:

    ab una parte haud satis prosperuin,

    Liv. 1, 32, 2 al.;

    so often in poets ab arte=arte,

    artfully, Tib. 1, 5, 4; 1, 9, 66; Ov. Am. 2, 4, 30.
    l.
    In the statement of the motive instead of ex, propter, or the simple abl. causae, from, out of, on account of, in consequence of: ab singulari amore scribo, Balb. ap. Cic. Att. 9, 7, B fin.:

    linguam ab irrisu exserentem,

    thrusting out the tongue in derision, Liv. 7, 10, 5:

    ab honore,

    id. 1, 8; so, ab ira, a spe, ab odio, v. Drak. ad Liv. 24, 30, 1: 26, 1, 3; cf. also Kritz and Fabri ad Sall. J. 31, 3, and Fabri ad Liv. 21, 36, 7.
    m.
    Especially in the poets instead of the gen.:

    ab illo injuria,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 129:

    fulgor ab auro,

    Lucr. 2, 5:

    dulces a fontibus undae,

    Verg. G. 2, 243.
    n.
    In indicating a part of the whole, for the more usual ex, of, out of:

    scuto ab novissimis uni militi detracto,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 25, 1:

    nonnuill ab novissimis,

    id. ib.; Cic. Sest. 65, 137; cf. id. ib. 59 fin.: a quibus (captivis) ad Senatum missus (Regulus).
    o.
    In marking that from which any thing proceeds, and to which it belongs:

    qui sunt ab ea disciplina,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 3, 7:

    ab eo qui sunt,

    id. Fin. 4, 3, 7:

    nostri illi a Platone et Aristotele aiunt,

    id. Mur. 30, 63 (in imitation of oi upo tinos).
    p.
    To designate an office or dignity (with or without servus; so not freq. till after the Aug. period;

    in Cic. only once): Pollex, servus a pedibus meus,

    one of my couriers, Cic. Att. 8, 5, 1; so,

    a manu servus,

    a secretary, Suet. Caes. 74: Narcissum ab eplstulis ( secretary) et Pallantem a rationibus ( accountant), id. Claud. 28; and so, ab actis, ab admissione, ab aegris, ab apotheca, ab argento, a balneis, a bibliotheca, a codicillis, a jumentis, a potione, etc. (v. these words and Inscr. Orell. vol. 3, Ind. xi. p. 181 sq.).
    q.
    The use of ab before adverbs is for the most part peculiar to later Latinity:

    a peregre,

    Vitr. 5, 7 (6), 8:

    a foris,

    Plin. 17, 24, 37; Vulg. Gen, 7, 16; ib. Matt. 23, 27:

    ab intus,

    ib. ib. 7, 15:

    ab invicem,

    App. Herb. 112; Vulg. Matt. 25, 32; Cypr. Ep. 63, 9: Hier. Ep. 18:

    a longe,

    Hyg. Fab. 257; Vulg. Gen. 22, 4; ib. Matt. 26, 58:

    a modo,

    ib. ib. 23, 39;

    Hier. Vit. Hilar.: a nune,

    Vulg. Luc. 1, 48:

    a sursum,

    ib. Marc. 15, 38.
    ► a.
    Ab is not repeated like most other prepositions (v. ad, ex, in, etc.) with pron. interrog. or relat. after subst. and pron. demonstr. with ab:

    Arsinoen, Stratum, Naupactum...fateris ab hostibus esse captas. Quibus autem hostibus? Nempe iis, quos, etc.,

    Cic. Pis. 37, 91:

    a rebus gerendis senectus abstrahit. Quibus? An iis, quae in juventute geruntur et viribus?

    id. Sen. 6:

    a Jove incipiendum putat. Quo Jove?

    id. Rep. 1, 36, 56:

    res publica, quascumque vires habebit, ab iis ipsis, quibus tenetur, de te propediem impetrabit,

    id. Fam. 4, 13, 5.—
    b.
    Ab in Plantus is once put after the word which it governs: quo ab, As. 1, 1, 106.—
    c.
    It is in various ways separated from the word which it governs:

    a vitae periculo,

    Cic. Brut. 91, 313:

    a nullius umquam me tempore aut commodo,

    id. Arch. 6, 12:

    a minus bono,

    Sall. C. 2, 6:

    a satis miti principio,

    Liv. 1, 6, 4:

    damnis dives ab ipsa suis,

    Ov. H. 9, 96; so id. ib. 12, 18; 13, 116.—
    d.
    The poets join a and que, making aque; but in good prose que is annexed to the following abl. (a meque, abs teque, etc.):

    aque Chao,

    Verg. G. 4, 347:

    aque mero,

    Ov. M. 3, 631:

    aque viro,

    id. H. 6, 156:

    aque suis,

    id. Tr. 5, 2, 74 al. But:

    a meque,

    Cic. Fam. 2, 16, 1:

    abs teque,

    id. Att. 3, 15, 4:

    a teque,

    id. ib. 8, 11, §

    7: a primaque adulescentia,

    id. Brut. 91, 315 al. —
    e.
    A Greek noun joined with ab stands in the dat.: a parte negotiati, hoc est pragmatikê, removisse, Quint. 3, 7, 1.
    III.
    In composition ab,
    1.
    Retains its original signif.: abducere, to take or carry away from some place: abstrahere, to draw auay; also, downward: abicere, to throw down; and denoting a departure from the idea of the simple word, it has an effect apparently privative: absimilis, departing from the similar, unlike: abnormis, departing from the rule, unusual (different from dissimilis, enormis); and so also in amens=a mente remotus, alienus ( out of one's senses, without self-control, insane): absurdus, missounding, then incongruous, irrational: abutor (in one of its senses), to misuse: aborior, abortus, to miscarry: abludo; for the privative force the Latin regularly employs in-, v. 2. in.—
    2.
    It more rarely designates completeness, as in absorbere, abutor ( to use up). (The designation of the fourth generation in the ascending or descending line by ab belongs here only in appearance; as abavus for quartus pater, great-great-grandfather, although the Greeks introduced upopappos; for the immutability of the syllable ab in abpatrnus and abmatertera, as well as the signif. Of the word abavus, grandfather's grandfather, imitated in abnepos, grandchild's grandchild, seems to point to a derivation from avi avus, as Festus, p. 13 Mull., explains atavus, by atta avi, or, rather, attae avus.)

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > ab

  • 97 duco

    dūco, xi, ctum, 3 ( imp. duc;

    but duce,

    Plaut. Ep. 3, 3, 18; id. Most. 1, 4, 11; id. Poen. 5, 4, 59; id. Rud. 2, 3, 55; id. Trin. 2, 2, 103; id. Truc. 2, 5, 26.— Perf. sync.: duxti, Varr. ap. Non. 283, 32; Cat. 91, 9; Prop. 1, 3, 27), v. a. [cf. Goth. tiuh-an; O. H. Germ. zieh-an, to draw; Germ. -zog, in Herzog, commander, duke], to lead, conduct, draw, bring forward, in all senses; very freq. passing over into the signif. of the compounds abducere, deducere, adducere, producere, etc., and of the synonyms agere, trahere, movere, etc. (very freq.).
    I.
    Lit.
    A.
    In gen.:

    quo sequar? quo ducis nunc me?

    Plaut. Bacch. 3, 3, 2: duc hos intro, id. Am. 2, 2, 224; id. Aul. 2, 6, 13:

    duc ac demonstra mihi,

    id. Cist. 2, 3, 36:

    suas secum mulierculas sunt in castra ducturi,

    Cic. Cat. 2, 10 fin.; cf. Caes. B. G. 5, 5 fin. et saep.:

    (difficile iter) vix qua singuli carri ducerentur,

    id. ib. 1, 6, 1; cf.

    plaustra,

    Ov. Tr. 3, 10, 34: aquam ducere, Cato ap. Charis. p. 192 P.; so,

    aquam per fundum ejus,

    Cic. Q. Fr. 3, 1, 2, § 4:

    spiritum naribus,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 3, 5: so,

    spiritum per siccas fauces,

    Sen. Ben. 3, 8; cf.:

    aërem spiritu,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 6 fin.:

    animam spiritu,

    id. ib. 2, 54, 136; and in gen.: spiritum, for to live, id. Fam. 10, 1; cf.:

    vitam et spiritum,

    id. de Imp. Pomp. 12, 33:

    tura naribus,

    to inhale, Hor. C. 4, 1, 22:

    sucos nectaris,

    to drink in full draughts, to quaff, id. ib. 3, 3, 34; cf.

    pocula,

    id. ib. 1, 17, 22; and:

    Liberum,

    id. ib. 4, 12, 14.— Poet.:

    jucunda oblivia vitae (referring to the waters of Lethe),

    Hor. S. 2, 6, 62 (cf. Verg. A. 6, 714 sq.) et saep.:

    mucronem,

    to draw from the scabbard, Verg. A. 12, 378; cf.:

    ferrum vaginā,

    Ov. F. 4, 929:

    ensem vagina,

    Sil. 8, 342;

    but: ensem duxerat faber,

    had beaten out, forged, Tib. 1, 3, 48:

    sortem,

    Cic. Div. 2, 33; Verg. A. 6, 22;

    hence, also transf. of that which is drawn by lot,

    Cic. Div. 1, 18, 34; id. Rep. 1, 34; Suet. Caes. 12; Tac. A. 1, 54; 3, 28 al.:

    pondus aratri,

    to draw, Ov. M. 7, 119:

    remos,

    to row, id. ib. 1, 294; cf. id. ib. 4, 353:

    numerosa brachia,

    in dancing, id. Am. 2, 4, 29:

    lanas,

    to spin, id. ib. 4, 34; cf.

    stamina,

    id. ib. 4, 221:

    ubera,

    to milk, id. ib. 9, 358:

    frena manu,

    to guide, govern, id. ib. 15, 518: vela, to haul (= navigare), Prop. 1, 6, 2:

    manus, of swimming,

    id. 3, 20, 2:

    ilia,

    to draw the flanks together, become broken-winded, Hor. Ep. 1, 1, 9:

    os,

    to draw awry, to make wry faces, Cic. Or. 25 fin.; Quint. 9, 3, 101; cf.

    vultum,

    Ov. M. 2, 774; id. P. 4, 8, 13; Mart. 1, 41 et saep.:

    non equus impiger Curru ducet Achaico Victorem,

    to draw along, Hor. C. 4, 3, 5; cf. id. Ep. 1, 1, 93.— Absol.:

    sibi quisque ducere, trahere, rapere,

    to take to one's self, appropriate, Sall. J. 41, 5.—
    B.
    Esp.
    1.
    To lead, conduct, as a way or road:

    via ducit (te), in urbem?

    Verg. E. 9, 1; cf. Plin. Ep. 7, 5; Verg. A. 1, 401; Ov. F. 2, 679:

    Brundisium Minuci melius via ducat an Appi,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 18, 20:

    via ad undas,

    Ov. M. 3, 602:

    via ad infernas sedes,

    id. ib. 4, 433; cf.:

    iter ad urbem,

    id. ib. 437; Curt. 3, 28, 19; Sen. Prov. 6, 7; id. Vit. Beat. 1; Plin. 18, 11, 29, § 111; Quint. 5, 9, 14; Liv. 5, 40, 8 al.—
    2.
    Se, in colloq. lang., to betake one's self, go:

    jam me ad regem recta ducam,

    Plaut. Am. 4, 3, 8; id. Aul. 4, 8, 8; id. Bacch. 4, 2, 11; Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 7: Balbus duxit se a Gadibus, Asin. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 32, 1.—
    3.
    A legal t. t., to take, lead away, drag, carry off a person before court, to prison, to punishment, etc.: POST. DEINDE. MANVS. INIECTIO. ESTO. IN. IVS. DVCITO, XII. Tab. ap. Gell. 20, 1, 45; so,

    in jus,

    Liv. 2, 27:

    illos duci in carcerem jubent,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 30:

    aliquem in carcerem,

    Suet. Caes. 20:

    in vincula,

    id. ib. 79:

    ad mortem,

    Cic. Cat. 1, 1, 1; Nep. Phoc. 4, 3; and absol.:

    ducite, ubi capiat, etc.,

    Plaut. Capt. 3, 5, 65; Sen. de Ira, 1, 16, 14; Suet. Calig. 27; Plin. Ep. 10, 97, 3 al.: NI. IVDICATVM. FACIT. AVT. QVIS. ENDO. EM. IVRE. VINDICIT. SECVM. DVCITO. VINCITO, etc., XII. Tab. ap. Gell. 20, 1, 45:

    decreta ejus modi: SI PETIT DUCAS. C. Fuficium duci jussit petitorem,

    to be imprisoned, Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 12, § 31; so of a debtor (addictus) who is led off as a slave, Novat. ap. Cic. de Or. 2, 63, 255; Plaut. Bacch. 5, 2, 87; Cic. Fl. 20 fin.; Liv. 6, 14 sq.; cf. id. 2, 23 med.; cf.

    prov.: stultitiast venatum ducere invitas canes,

    Plaut. Stich. 1, 2, 83. —
    4.
    Uxorem, to lead a wife home, i. e. to marry:

    bona uxor si ea deducta est, etc.... Verum egon eam ducam domum, Quae, etc.?

    Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 91:

    uxorem domum,

    id. Aul. 2, 1, 40; Ter. Ph. 2, 1, 68:

    filiam Orgetorigis in matrimonium,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 9, 3; cf. Liv. 4, 4:

    eum uxorem ducturum esse aliam,

    Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 105:

    uxorem (or aliquam, filiam alicujus, etc.),

    id. Aul. 2, 1, 48; id. Cas. prol. 69 et saep.; Ter. And. 1, 1, 128; 2, 1, 21 et saep.; Cic. Sest. 3; Caes. B. G. 1, 53, 4; id. B. C. 3, 110, 2; Verg. E. 8, 29; Vulg. Marc. 10, 11 et saep.— Absol.:

    si tu negaris ducere,

    Ter. And. 2, 3, 5; 2, 3, 9; id. Phorm. 2, 3, 76; Liv. 4, 4 al.: jugum ducere cum infidelibus, i. e. to be yoked in marriage, Vulg. 2 Cor. 6, 14.—Rarely for nubere: si ignorans statum Erotis ut liberum duxisti, isque postea servus est judicatus, etc., Imp. Antonin. ap. Cod. Just. 5, 18, 3.—In the comic poets, of taking home prostitutes, Plaut. Most. 1, 1, 35; 4, 2, 44; id. Men. 1, 2, 15; id. Stich. 5, 4, 48; id. Truc. 3, 2, 10 et saep.—
    5.
    In milit. lang.
    a.
    Said of a commander, to lead, to cause to move, to march his army in any direction:

    locis apertis exercitum ducere,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 41, 4; cf. id. B. C. 1, 64 fin.; 1, 68, 1:

    exercitum ab Allobrogibus in Segusianos,

    id. B. G. 1, 10 fin.:

    exercitum in fines Suessionum,

    id. ib. 2, 12, 1; cf. id. ib. 4, 38, 3;

    5, 18, 1: exercitum (legiones, etc.) in Bellovacos,

    id. ib. 2, 13, 1; 5, 24, 2 et saep.; cf. Tac. A. 2, 57:

    cohortes ad eam partem munitionum, quae, etc.,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 62, 2:

    exercitum Uticam,

    id. ib. 2, 26, 1:

    reliquas copias contra Labienum,

    id. B. G. 7, 61 fin. et saep.—In pass., of the soldiers, to march, move:

    quam in partem aut quo consilio ducerentur,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 40, 2.—And in act., absol., of the general himself, to march, move (a favorite expression of Liv.;

    not in Caes. or Sall.): (Mettus) ducit, quam proxime ad hostem potest,

    Liv. 1, 23; 1, 27; 9, 35; 22, 18 et saep.—Hence,
    b.
    In gen., to lead, command an army or (more freq.) a division:

    qua in legatione duxit exercitum,

    Cic. Mur. 9, 20; so,

    exercitum,

    Nep. Eum. 13, 1; id. Epam. 7, 3:

    qui superiore anno primum pilum duxerat,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 35, 6; 6, 38, 1; id. B. C. 3, 91, 1:

    ordinem,

    id. ib. 1, 13, 4; 3, 104, 3; Suet. Vesp. 1:

    partem exercitūs,

    Sall. J. 55, 4 et saep.—Rarely, to lead a division in front, in advance:

    consuetudine sua Caesar sex legiones expeditas ducebat: post eas... inde, etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 19, 2; hence also, to march in front, take the lead, said of the division that forms the van:

    pars equitum et auxiliariae cohortes ducebant, mox prima legio, etc.,

    Tac. A. 1, 51; cf. id. ib. 1, 64 fin. —
    (β).
    Transf. beyond the milit. sphere, to lead, to be leader, head, chief, first in any thing:

    accedit etiam, quod familiam ducit,

    Cic. Fam. 7, 5 fin. Manut.; so,

    familiam,

    id. Phil. 5, 11, 30; id. Fin. 4, 16, 45:

    ordines,

    id. Phil. 1, 8, 20:

    classem (discipulorum),

    Quint. 1, 2, 24 Spald.:

    funus,

    Hor. Epod. 8, 12:

    toros,

    Ov. F. 6, 668 et saep.—
    c.
    To conduct as prisoners in a triumph:

    per triumphum,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 26, § 67:

    in triumpho,

    Plin. 7, 43, 45, § 139, v. triumphus.—
    6.
    With the accessory idea of creation, formation, to produce, form, construct, make, fashion, shape, dispose (cf.:

    struo, pono, condo, fundo): parietem per vestibulum alicujus,

    to erect, Cic. Mil. 27 fin.; cf.

    muros,

    Hor. C. 4, 6, 23:

    vallum ex castris ad aquam,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 73, 2:

    fossam,

    id. B. G. 7, 72, 1; 7, 73, 2:

    arcum,

    Ov. M. 3, 160:

    lateres de terra,

    Vitr. 2, 3:

    vivos vultus de marmore (with excudere spirantia aera),

    Verg. A. 6, 849; cf. id. ib. 7, 634; Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 240; Varr. ap. Non. 283, 32; Plin. 7, 37, 38, § 125; Quint. 10, 3, 18 Spald.; Juv. 7, 237; hence, poet. also:

    epos,

    Hor. S. 1, 10, 44:

    carmen,

    Ov. Tr. 1, 11, 18; 3, 14, 32:

    versus,

    id. ib. 5, 12, 63 et saep.:

    liniam ex colore,

    Plin. 35, 10, 36, § 81; Quint. 2, 6, 2; cf.

    orbem,

    id. 11, 3, 118:

    alvum,

    to bring forth by clysters, Cels. 2, 12; 4, 4 et saep.: alapam alicui, qs. to fetch one a box on the ear, Phaedr. 5, 3, 2; cf.

    colaphum,

    Quint. 6, 3, 83 Spald.:

    pugnum,

    Dig. 47, 10, 4 et saep.;

    so esp. of processions, dances, etc.: funus,

    Cic. Quint. 15 fin.; Ov. M. 14, 746; Verg. G. 4, 256; cf.

    exsequias,

    Plin. 8, 42, 64, § 154:

    pompam,

    Ov. H. 12, 152; id. F. 6, 405; id. M. 13, 699:

    choros,

    Tib. 2, 1, 56; Hor. C. 1, 4, 5; 4, 7, 6 et saep.; cf.

    choreas,

    Ov. M. 8, 582; 14, 520.—
    7.
    To receive, admit, take any thing (not ante-Aug.):

    cicatricem,

    Ov. Tr. 3, 11, 66; Liv. 29, 32, 12:

    rimam,

    Ov. M. 4, 65:

    situm,

    to grow rusty, Quint. 1, 2, 18:

    formam,

    Ov. M. 1, 402:

    colorem,

    id. ib. 3, 485; cf.

    pallorem,

    to grow pale, id. ib. 8, 760:

    nomina,

    Hor. C. 3, 27, 76:

    notam,

    id. ib. 4, 2, 59 et saep.
    II.
    Trop.
    A.
    In gen., to lead, guide, draw, conduct:

    progredimur quo ducit quemque voluntas,

    Lucr. 2, 258; cf. Hor. Ep. 1, 3, 27; 1, 6, 57:

    ad strepitum citharae cessatum ducere curam,

    id. ib. 1, 2, 31:

    Liber vota bonos ducit ad exitus,

    id. C. 4, 8, 34; cf. Quint. 12, 1, 26:

    per quaedam parva sane ducant (futurum oratorem),

    id. 1, 10, 5; cf. id. 1, 1, 27; 1, 5, 58.—Prov.:

    ducunt volentem fata, nolentem trahunt,

    Sen. Ep. 107.—
    B.
    In partic.
    1.
    To draw, deduce, [p. 616] derive its origin or beginning from, any thing:

    ab aliqua re totius vitae ducere exordium,

    Cic. Fin. 5, 7, 18; cf.:

    exordium a nostra persona,

    Quint. 3, 8, 8; 4, 1, 7:

    principium disputationis a principe investigandae veritatis,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 21 fin.:

    belli initium a fame,

    id. Att. 9, 9, 2; cf. Quint. 1, 1, 21:

    initia causasque omnium ex quatuor temporum mutationibus,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 19, 49:

    originem ab Isocrate,

    Quint. 2, 15, 4; 1, 6, 38; Hor. C. 3, 17, 5 al.:

    ingressionem non ex oratoriis disputationibus, sed, etc.,

    Cic. Or. 3, 11:

    honestum ab iis rebus,

    id. Off. 1, 18, 60; id. Or. 39, 135:

    nomen ex quo,

    id. Ac. 11, 41; cf.:

    nomen a Graeco,

    Quint. 1, 6, 3; 3, 7, 1; Hor. S. 2, 1, 66 et saep.; cf.

    also: utrumque (sc. amor et amicitia) ductum (al. dictum) est ab amando,

    Cic. Lael. 27; id. Fin. 2, 24, 78.—
    2.
    To lead a person, as regards his will or opinions, in any direction; to move, incite, induce, allure, in a good or bad sense (most freq. in the pass.):

    ita me ad credendum tua ducit oratio,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 18:

    nos ducit scholarum consuetudo,

    Quint. 4, 2, 28; 5, 11, 19; cf. id. 9, 1, 21:

    ducit te species,

    Hor. S. 2, 2, 35 et saep.:

    declamatores quosdam perversa ducit ambitio, ut, etc.,

    Quint. 10, 7, 21.—In the pass.:

    si quis statuarum honore aut gloria ducitur,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 58 fin.:

    eloquentiae laude,

    id. Or. 32, 115:

    quaestu et lucro,

    id. Tusc. 5, 3, 9:

    hoc errore ut, etc.,

    id. Off. 1, 41; cf.:

    litteris eorum et urbanitate, ut, etc.,

    id. Rosc. Am. 41, 120:

    omnes trahimur et ducimur ad cognitionis et scientiae cupiditatem,

    id. Off. 1, 6 et saep.—
    b.
    In a bad sense, to cheat, deceive, Plaut. Most. 3, 2, 26; id. Capt. 4, 2, 7; Ter. And. 4, 1, 20; id. Ph. 3, 2, 15; Prop. 2, 17, 1 (3, 8, 1 M.); Ov. H. 19, 13; id. M. 3, 587 (with decipere).—
    3.
    With regard to time, to draw out, extend, protract, prolong:

    bellum,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 38, 4; id. B. C. 2, 18, 6; 2, 37, 5 sq.; Cic. Fam. 7, 3, 2; Liv. 22, 25 et saep.; cf.:

    bellum longius,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 64, 2; 3, 42, 3:

    bellum in hiemem,

    id. ib. 1, 61, 3:

    eam rem longius,

    id. B. G. 7, 11, 4; cf.:

    rem prope in noctem,

    id. B. C. 3, 51, 7:

    rem leniter,

    Liv. 3, 41 et saep. Also transf., of time itself:

    tempus,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 11; Nep. Them. 7:

    diem ex die,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 16, 4; and of persons who are put off, delayed:

    ubi se diutius duci intellexit,

    id. ib. 1, 16, 5.—Less freq. (mostly poet.),
    b.
    In gen., of time, to pass, spend, enjoy:

    aetatem in litteris,

    Cic. Fin. 5, 19, 50; so,

    aetatem,

    Hor. Ep. 2, 2, 202:

    vitam,

    id. Epod. 17, 63; Sen. Ep. 45, 10; cf. Verg. A. 2, 641 (where, shortly before, vitam producere):

    noctes,

    Prop. 1, 11, 5; Plin. Ep. 6, 31, 13:

    somnos,

    Verg. A. 4, 560.—
    4.
    In mercant. lang., to calculate, compute, reckon: age nunc summam sumptus duc, Lucil. ap. Non. 283, 30:

    minimum ut sequamur, quoniam XC. medimnūm milia duximus, accedant eo, etc.,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 49; id. Att. 6, 1, 5 and 16; 6, 2, 7; Varr. R. R. 3, 16, 11; Gell. 1, 20, 5.—
    b.
    Transf. beyond the mercant. sphere.
    (α).
    Rationem alicujus, to consider, calculate, care for one's advantage or interest (a favorite expression of Cicero):

    duxi meam rationem, quam tibi facile me probaturum arbitrabar,

    Cic. Att. 8, 11 D, § 7; so,

    suam quoque rationem,

    to have respect to one's own advantage, id. Verr. 2, 1, 48; and:

    non minorem aratorum quam populi rationem,

    Suet. Aug. 42 fin.:

    salutis meae rationem,

    Cic. Fam. 7, 3:

    rationem officii, non commodi,

    id. Sest. 10, 23; cf. id. Rosc. Am. 44, 128:

    unius cujusque temporis ducta ratio est,

    id. Div. in Caecil. 4, 16:

    rationem officii atque existimationis,

    id. Quint. 16, 53.—
    (β).
    In gen., to reckon, consider, hold, account, esteem as any thing (cf. aestimo and existimo;

    very freq. in prose and poetry): parvi id ducebat,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 8, 24:

    pro nihilo aliquid,

    Plaut. Pers. 4, 4, 85; Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 16 fin.; id. Tusc. 5, 32, 90; cf. Auct. Her. 4, 20, 28:

    ea pro falsis ducit,

    Sall. C. 3, 2; cf.:

    innocentiam pro malevolentia,

    id. ib. 12, 1:

    vos eritis judices, Laudin' an vitio duci id factum oportuit,

    Ter. Ad. prol. 5; so,

    aliquid honori,

    Sall. J. 11, 3:

    aliquid laudi, Nep. praef. § 4: aliquem despicatui,

    Cic. Fl. 27, 65: nihil praeter virtutem in bonis ducere (for which, shortly after, in bonis habere = numerare), Cic. Fin. 3, 3;

    aliquem in numero hostium,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 25 fin.; Caes. B. G. 6, 32, 1; cf. ib. 6, 23, 8; without in, ib. 6, 21, 2; cf.:

    aliquem loco affinium,

    Sall. J. 14, 1 Kritz. N. cr.: aliquid testimonii loco, Quint. 5, 9, 10:

    tutelae nostrae duximus, cum Africo bello urgerentur,

    Liv. 21, 41; cf.:

    officii duxit exorare filiae patrem, etc.,

    Suet. Tib. 11:

    faceret, quod e republica fideque sua duceret,

    id. ib. 25, 7 et saep.:

    malum cum amici tuum ducis malum,

    Plaut. Capt. 1, 2, 48; cf.:

    Archytas iracundiam seditionem quandam animi vere ducebat,

    Cic. Rep. 1, 38:

    eorum, quos idoneos ducebat, consilium habet,

    Sall. J. 62, 4:

    nil rectum nisi quod placuit sibi ducunt,

    Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 83.— With acc. and inf.:

    sic equidem ducebam animo rebarque futurum,

    Verg. A. 6, 690:

    ut omnia tua in te posita esse ducas humanosque casus virtute inferiores putes,

    Cic. Lael. 2, 7, 19 fin.; id. Rep. 1, 2; 1, 17; 1, 38; 3, 9 (three times); Sall. J. 93, 5; Liv. 22, 14, 6; 22, 59, 5; Caes. B. G. 1, 3, 2; 4, 30, 2; 6, 18 et saep.—Here too probably belongs the much disputed passage: ludos et inania honoris medio rationis atque abundantiae duxit (= ludos publicos cum aliis rebus quae ad inania honoris pertinent, duxit, i. e. existimavit habendos et ponendos in medio rationis atque abundantiae, ut inter rationem, quae plane spernit inania, et abundantiam, quae eadem ostentat, media via incederet), he thought right to manage them in a middle course between reason and profusion, Tac. Agr. 6 fin., v. Dübner and Orell. ad h. l.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > duco

  • 98 nam

    nam, conj. [ acc. sing. fem. of pronom. stem na-; cf.: egô-nê, tu-nê; Lat. ne, nae; masc. num; cf.: tum, tam; quom, quam].
    I.
    To introduce a confirmation or explanation, for (always in prose beginning the sentence; cf.: enim, etenim, and v. infra C.).
    A.
    Introducing an explanation or fuller statement of something already said.
    1.
    In gen.:

    is pagus appellabatur Tigurinus. Nam omnis civitas Helvetia in quattuor pagos divisa est,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 12, 4:

    quibus rebus auditis... suas quoque copias in tres partes distribuerunt. Nam praesidio e regione castrorum relicto... reliquas copias, etc.,

    id. ib. 7, 61, 5: neque solum colent inter se ac diligent, sed etiam verebuntur. Nam maximum ornamentum amicitiae tollit, qui ex eā tollit verecundiam, Cic. [p. 1185] Lael. 22, 82; id. Part. Or. 11, 38; id. Or. 43, 147; cf.:

    pandite atque aperite propere januam hanc Orci, opsecro. Nam equidem haut aliter esse duco,

    Plaut. Bacch. 3, 1, 2. —
    2.
    Esp.
    (α).
    To introduce an explanatory parenthetical clause:

    omni ratione colenda justitia est, tum ipsa per sese (nam aliter justitia non esset), tum, etc.,

    Cic. Off. 2, 12, 42:

    et in insulā quae est in Fibreno —nam hoc, opinor, illi alteri flumini nomen est—sermoni reliquo demus operam sedentes,

    id. Leg. 2, 1, 1:

    tamen is ad id locorum talis vir (nam postea ambitione praeceps datus est), consulatum adpetere non audebat,

    Sall. J. 63, 6; Sen. Ep. 40, 9.—
    (β).
    To resume the course of thought after a parenthetical interruption:

    hic vero simul... atque me mare transisse cognovit (audi, audi, atque attende...), nam simul ac me Dyrrachium attigisse audivit, etc.,

    Cic. Planc. 41, 98:

    duplex inde Hannibali gaudium fuit (neque enim quidquam eorum, quae apud hostes agerentur, eum fallebat): nam et liberam Minucii temeritatem se suo modo capturum, et sollertiae Fabii dimidium virium decessisse,

    Liv. 22, 28, 1.—
    (γ).
    To introduce an example, or several examples, illustrating a general statement, for example, for instance:

    sed vivo Catone minores natu multi uno tempore oratores floruerunt. Nam et A. Albinus... et litteratus et disertus fuit. Nam Q. Metellus... in primis est habitus eloquens,

    Cic. Brut. 21, 81:

    quin etiam easdem causas ut quisque egerit utile erit scire. Nam de domo Ciceronis dixit Calidius, et pro Milone orationem Brutus exercitationis gratiā scripsit,

    Quint. 10, 1, 23; 8, 6, 38; Prop. 3 (4), 1, 23.—
    B.
    Introducing a ground or reason for a fact, command, or principle.
    1.
    In gen.:

    quamobrem, Quirites, celebratote illos dies cum conjugibus ac liberis vestris: nam multi saepe honores dīs immortalibus justi habiti sunt, sed profecto justiores numquam,

    Cic. Cat. 3, 10, 23: vires vitaque corpus meum nunc deserit omne: nam me visus homo pulcher, etc., Enn. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 20, 40:

    qui... dilectum habere noluerit. Nam sociorum auxilia aut ita imbecilla sunt, ut non multum nos juvare possint, etc.,

    Cic. Fam. 15, 1, 11.—
    2.
    Esp., introducing the speaker's reason for a particular form of statement, etc.:

    Phoenices alias urbes in orā maritumā condidere... nam de Carthagine silere melius puto quam parum dicere,

    Sall. J. 19, 1; cf.

    Mercuri (nam te docilis magistro Movit Amphion lapides canendo), etc.,

    Hor. C. 3, 11, 1;

    so in a question: una domus erat, idem victus isque communis... nam quid ego de studiis dicam cognoscendi semper aliquid, etc.,

    Cic. Lael. 27, 104:

    nam quid ego de cotidiano sermone querimoniāque populi Romani loquar?

    id. Verr. 2, 1, 49, § 129.—
    3.
    Loosely, introducing the speaker's reason for saying what precedes: nam ego ad Menaechmum nunc eo ( I have said this), for, etc., Plaut. Men. 1, 1, 20; id. Trin. 1, 1, 3 Brix ad loc.—So esp. after a general remark, introducing its illustration in the case in hand, Plaut. Truc. 1, 1, 58 Spengel ad loc.; id. Most. 5, 1, 3; id. Mil. 2, 1, 17.—
    4.
    In a still looser connection, introducing a particular fact or argument in support of what precedes, but, now, certainly:

    L. Sisennae omnis facultas ex historiā ipsius perspici potest, quae cum facile vincat superiores, tum indicat quantum absit a summo... Nam Q. Hortensii admodum adulescentis ingenium simul aspectum et probatum est,

    Cic. Brut. 64, 228; 43, 161; id. Div. 2, 31, 66; 2, 32, 68:

    at prooemium aliquando et narrationem dicit malus homo et argumenta sic, ut nihil sit in his requirendum. Nam et latro pugnabit acriter, virtus tamen erit fortitudo,

    Quint. 2, 20, 10.—
    5.
    Ellipt., in reply to a question or remark, where the answer is implied, and nam introduces the reason for it; for assuredly, certainly:

    nos hunc Heracliensem, multis civitatibus expetitum... de nostrā civitate eiciemus? Nam si quis minorem gloriae fructum putat ex Graecis versibus percipi quam ex Latinis, vehementer errat,

    Cic. Arch. 10, 22 sq.:

    numquid ergo hic Lysimachus, felicitate quādam dentibus leonis elapsus, ob hoc cum ipse regnaret mitior fuit? Nam Telesphorum Rhodium amicum suum... in caveā velut novum animal aliquod... pavit,

    Sen. de Ira. 3, 17, 3; cf.: de eis rebus, inquit Crassus, quibus sciam poteroque. Tum ille:

    nam quod tu non poteris aut nescies, quis nostrum tam impudens est, qui se scire aut posse postulet?

    Cic. de Or. 1, 22, 101.—So with particles of asseveration: mehercule, hercule, edepol, etc.: tamen tibi a me nulla orta est injuria. Aes. Nam hercle etiam hoc restat, i. e. not yet; for that is to come hereafter, Ter. Ad. 2, 1, 36: sume, posce, prome quidvis: te facio cellarium. Er. Nam nisi hercle manticinatus probe ero, fusti pectito, Plaut. Capt. 4, 2, 115:

    dicunt ei fere nullam esse columnam, quae ad perpendiculum esse possit. Nam mehercule, inquit, sic agamus: columnae ad perpendiculum exigantur,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 51, § 133.—
    C.
    The conjunction nam sometimes follows a word of the clause ( poet. and perh. not ante-Aug.; v. Lachm. ad Lucr. p. 246):

    prohibent nam cetera Parcae Scire,

    Verg. A. 3, 379:

    solam nam perfidus ille Te colere,

    id. ib. 4, 421; 10, 585;

    1, 444: olim nam quaerere amabam,

    Hor. S. 2, 3, 20; 41:

    ego nam videor mihi sanus,

    id. ib. 2, 3, 302:

    his nam plebecula plaudit,

    id. Ep. 2, 1, 186.
    II.
    In transitions.
    A.
    Introducing a new subject as of secondary importance; but now, on the other hand:

    nam quod rumores distulerunt malivoli, Multas contamināsse Graecas, dum facit Paucas Latinas: factum hic esse id non negat, Neque se pigere,

    Ter. Heaut. prol. 19:

    nam quod purgas eos, quos ego mihi scripsi invidisse, etc.,

    Cic. Att. 3, 15, 2:

    nam quod negas te dubitare quin magnā in offensā sim apud Pompeium hoc tempore, non video causam cur ita sit,

    id. ib. 9, 2, a, 2; id. Off. 2, 13, 47:

    nam auguralis libros ad commune utriusque nostrum otium serva,

    id. Fam. 3, 11, 4:

    nam Vestae nomen a Graecis est, i. e. though that of Janus, before named, is Latin,

    id. N. D. 2, 27, 67; id. Div. 2, 31, 66; 2, 32, 68; Quint. 1, 11, 7; 10, 1, 9.—
    B.
    Esp., in referring to a consideration too obvious to require discussion, for obviously, for it is certain, etc.:

    postremo hoc in pectus tuum demitte, numquam populum Romanum beneficiis victum esse: nam bello quid valeat, tute scis,

    Sall. J. 102, 11; Liv. 39, 26, 3; Cic. Tusc. 4, 23, 52; Tac. H. 4, 76.
    III.
    In interrogations, emphatically, expressing wonder or emotion in the questioner; cf. Gr. gar.
    A.
    With an interrogative.
    1.
    Beginning a sentence (anteclass. and poet.): perdidisti omnem operam? Ep. Nam quī perdidi? but how? but why? Plaut. Ep. 1, 2, 29:

    nam quem ego adspicio?

    id. Poen. 5, 3, 3: quid ego ago? Tr. Nam quid tu, malum, me rogitas quid agas? id. Most. 2, 1, 21:

    nam quae haec anus est exanimata a fratre quae egressa'st meo?

    Ter. Phorm. 5, 1, 5:

    nam quid ita?

    id. Eun. 5, 2, 58:

    nam quem? alium habui neminem,

    id. ib. 4, 4, 13:

    nam quam ob rem? (= quamnam),

    Plaut. Am. 2, 1, 2:

    nam quā me causā extrusisti ex aedibus?

    id. Aul. 1, 1, 5 et saep.:

    nam quis te, juvenum confidentissime, nostras Jussit adire domos?

    Verg. G. 4, 445 (but cf. Forbig. ad loc. and Kritz ad Sall. J. 19, 2):

    nam quae tam sera moratur Segnities?

    id. A. 2, 373:

    bellua multorum es capitum. Nam quid sequar aut quem?

    Hor. Ep. 1, 1, 76.—
    2.
    Joined as enclitic to an interrogative word:

    quinam homo hic ante aedīs nostras conqueritur?

    Plaut. Aul. 4, 9, 17:

    quidnam id est?

    id. Trin. 5, 2, 45:

    quisnam igitur tuebitur P. Scipionis memoriam mortui?

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 36, § 80:

    O di immortales, ubinam gentium sumus?

    id. Cat. 1, 4, 9; id. N. D. 1, 10, 24:

    sed Allobroges diu in incerto habuere quidnam consilii caperent,

    Sall. C. 41, 1.—For quianam, v. quia fin. —
    3.
    Separated from the interrogative word:

    quid tibi ex filio nam, obsecro, aegre est?

    Plaut. Bacch. 5, 1, 27:

    quis ea'st nam optuma?

    id. Aul. 2, 1, 17; 3, 2, 3:

    quid cerussa opus nam?

    id. Most. 1, 3, 101:

    quis est nam ludus in undis?

    Verg. E. 9, 39.—
    4.
    With num:

    num tibi nam, amabo, janua est mordax mea?

    Plaut. Truc. 2, 4, 1:

    num quid nam tibi molestum est, gnate mi, si, etc.,

    id. As. 5, 1, 3; cf.:

    comicum est et Terentianum numquidnam, cum exemptis num et nam sufficere ad interrogationem potuisset quid,

    Donat. ad Ter. And. 1, 4, 8:

    num nam haec audivit,

    Ter. Heaut. 3, 2, 6:

    num quid nam de oratore ipso restat,

    Cic. Part. Or. 7, 26.—
    B.
    Without an interrogative word (very rare): scis nam tibi quae praecepi? Plaut. Pers. 3, 1, 51. (For fuller details, v. Hand, Turs. 4, pp. 1-22.)

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > nam

  • 99 per

    per, prep. with acc. (by solecism with abl. PER QVO, = whereby, Inscr. Miseni Repert. ex a. p. Chr. n. 159; Inscr. Orell. 3300) [kindr. with Gr. para; Sanscr. pāra, ulterior; Lith. pèr; cf.: parumper, paulisper; v. Curt. Griech. Etym. p. 269], denotes, like the Gr. dia, motion through a space, or extension over it.
    I.
    Lit., of space, through, through the midst of, throughout, all over, all along: per amoena salicta raptare aliquem, Enn. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 20, 40 (Ann. v. 40 Vahl.): inde Fert sese (equus) campi per caerula laetaque prata, id. ap. Macr. S. 6, 3 (id. v. 505 ib.): per amoenam urbem leni fluit agmine flumen, id. ap. id. ib. 6, 4 (id. v. 177 ib.):

    per membranas oculorum cernere,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 57, 142:

    coronam auream per forum ferre,

    id. Att. 14, 16, 2:

    iit hasta per tempus utrumque,

    Verg. A. 9, 418:

    se per munitiones deicere,

    Caes. B. G. 3, 26:

    per mare pauperiem fugiens, per saxa, per ignes,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 1, 46:

    per ignes,

    Ov. M. 8, 76:

    per Averna,

    id. ib. 14, 105:

    per caelum,

    Verg. A. 4, 700:

    per vias fabulari,

    in all the streets, Plaut. Cist. 5, 1:

    per totam urbem,

    id. Ep. 2, 2, 11:

    qui per provincias atque imperium tuum pecunias ei credidissent,

    in the provinces, Cic. Fam. 1, 7, 6:

    invitati hospitaliter per domos,

    Liv. 1, 9:

    via secta per ambas (zonas),

    Verg. G. 1, 238; 245:

    nascuntur copiosissime in Balearibus ac per Hispanias,

    in, Plin. 19, 5, 30, § 94:

    per illas gentes celebratur,

    throughout, Tac. A. 12, 12:

    gustūs elementa per omnia quaerunt,

    Juv. 11, 14.—

    Placed after the noun: viam per,

    Lucr. 6, 1264:

    transtra per et remos et pictas abiete puppes,

    Verg. A. 5, 663; 6, 692.
    II.
    Transf.
    A.
    Of time, through, throughout, during, for:

    quod des bubus per hiemem,

    the winter through, during the winter, Cato, R. R. 25:

    nulla res per triennium, nisi ad nutum istius, judicata est,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 5, 13:

    nulla abs te per hos dies epistula... venerat,

    during these days, id. Att. 2, 8, 1:

    per decem dies ludi facti sunt,

    id. Cat. 3, 8, 20:

    per idem tempus,

    during, at, in the course of, id. Brut. 83, 286; Suet. Galb. 10:

    per noctem cernuntur sidera,

    during the night, in the night-time, Plin. 2, 10, 7, § 48:

    per inducias,

    during, Liv. 38, 2: per multa bella, id. 8, 13:

    per ludos,

    id. 2, 18:

    per comitia,

    Suet. Caes. 80:

    per somnum,

    id. ib. 45: per tempus, during, i. e. at the right time, = in tempore, Plaut. Poen. 1, 1, 6; Ter. And. 4, 4, 44; id. Hec. 4, 3, 16.—So distr.:

    per singulas noctes,

    Suet. Caes. 1; id. Calig. 22; cf.:

    per haec,

    meanwhile, id. Claud. 27:

    per quae,

    id. Tib. 52.—
    B.
    To indicate the agent, instrument, or means, through, by, by means of:

    statuerunt injurias per vos ulcisci,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 3, § 9:

    detrimenta publicis rebus per homines eloquentissimos importata,

    id. de Or. 1, 9, 38:

    quid ais? vulgo occidebantur? Per quos? et a quibus?

    by whom? and by whose command? id. Rosc. Am. 29, 80:

    quae domi gerenda sunt, ea per Caeciliam transiguntur,

    id. ib. 51, 149:

    quod nefarium stuprum non per illum factum est,

    id. Cat. 2, 4, 7.—Placed after its case:

    Exerce vocem, quam per vivis et colis,

    Plaut. Poen. prol. 13.—Esp.: per fidem decipere, fallere, etc. (= datā fide): per fidem deceptus sum, through confidence, i. e. in my host who betrayed me, Plaut. Most. 2, 2, 69; Cic. Inv. 1, 39, 71; Caes. B. G. 1, 46, 3.—So, per se, per te, through himself, by himself, of himself, etc.:

    homo per se cognitus, sine ullā commendatione majorum,

    Cic. Brut. 25, 96:

    per me tibi obstiti, = solus,

    by myself, id. Cat. 1, 5, 11:

    satis per te tibi consulis,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 17, 1:

    per se solus,

    Liv. 1, 49.—With ipse:

    nihil ipsos per se sine P. Sullā facere potuisse,

    Cic. Sull. 24, 67:

    ipsum per se, suā vi, sua naturā, sua sponte laudabile,

    id. Fin. 2, 15, 50.—To form an adverb. expression, in, by, through, etc.:

    non dubitavi id a te per litteras petere,

    by letter, Cic. Fam. 2, 6, 2:

    per summum dedecus vitam amittere,

    in the most infamous manner, most infamously, id. Rosc. Am. 11, 30:

    per iram facere aliquid,

    in anger, id. Tusc. 4, 37, 79:

    per commodum,

    Liv. 30, 29, 3 (cf. II. A. supra):

    per commodum rei publicae,

    id. 10, 25, 17; 22, 57, 1; 31, 11, 2:

    per ludum et jocum,

    sporting and jesting, in sport and jest, Cic. Verr. 2, 1, 60, § 155; cf. id. ib. 2, 5, 70, §

    181: per vim,

    forcibly, Sall. J. 23, 1:

    per dolum,

    id. ib. 11, 8:

    per otium,

    at leisure, Liv. 4, 58, 12:

    ceteris copiis per otium trajectis,

    id. 21, 28, 4:

    cibo per otium capto,

    id. 21, 55, 1:

    per tumultum = tumultuose,

    id. 44, 45, 14. —
    C.
    To designate the reason, cause, inducement, etc., through, for, by, on account of, for the sake of:

    per metum mussari,

    Plaut. Aul. 2, 1, 12:

    qui per virtutem perit, at non interit,

    id. Capt. 3, 5, 32:

    cum antea per aetatem nondum hujus auctoritatem loci attingere auderem,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 1, 1:

    per aetatem,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 16 fin.:

    Druso propinquanti quasi per officium obviae fuere legiones,

    Tac. A. 1, 24:

    ut nihil eum delectaret, quod aut per naturam fas esset aut per leges liceret,

    Cic. Mil. 16, 43:

    cum per valetudinem posses, venire tamen noluisti,

    id. Fam. 7, 1, 1: per me, per te, etc., as far as concerns me, you, etc.:

    si per vos licet,

    Plaut. As. prol. 12:

    per me vel stertas licet,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 29, 93; cf.:

    sin hoc non licet per Cratippum,

    id. Off. 3, 7, 33:

    fides publica per sese inviolata,

    Sall. J. 33, 3:

    per me ista pedibus trahantur,

    Cic. Att. 4, 16, 10:

    per me stetisse, quo minus hae fierent nuptiae,

    Ter. And. 4, 2, 16:

    si per suos esset licitum,

    Nep. Eum. 10, 3:

    inspicere vitia nec per magistros nec per aetatem licebat,

    Macr. S. 1, 24. —Hence, in oaths, entreaties, asseverations, etc., by a god, by men, or by inanimate or abstract things, by:

    IOVRANTO PER IOVEM, etc., Tab. Bant. lin. 15: per pol saepe peccas,

    Plaut. Cas. 2, 6, 18; cf.:

    si per plures deos juret,

    Cic. Rab. Post. 13, 36:

    quid est enim, per deos, optabilius sapientiā?

    id. Off. 2, 2, 5:

    per deos atque homines,

    id. Div. 2, 55, 116:

    per dexteram te istam oro,

    id. Deiot. 3, 8; cf.:

    per tuam fidem Te obtestor,

    Ter. And. 1, 5, 55:

    nunc te per amicitiam et per amorem obsecro,

    id. ib. 2, 1, 26:

    per pietatem!

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 4:

    per comitatem edepol, pater, etc.,

    id. ib. 2, 2, 52.—In this signif. often separated from its object:

    per ego vobis deos atque homines dies, ut, etc.,

    Plaut. Men. 5, 7, 1:

    per ego te deos oro,

    Ter. And. 3, 3, 6; 5, 1, 15:

    per ego te, fili... precor quaesoque, etc.,

    Liv. 23, 9, 2:

    per ego has lacrimas... te Oro,

    Verg. A. 4, 314; 12, 56; Tib. 4, 5, 7; Ov. F. 2, 841:

    per vos Tyrrhena faventum Stagna deum, per ego et Trebiam cineresque Sagunti Obtestor,

    Sil. 12, 79 sq.; 1, 658; Stat. Th. 11, 367.—With ellips. of object:

    per, si qua est... Intemerata fides, oro, i. e. per eam,

    Verg. A. 2, 142; 10, 903:

    per, si quid merui de te bene, perque manentem amorem, Ne, etc.,

    Ov. M. 7, 854.—Sometimes to indicate an apparent or pretended cause or inducement, under the show or pretext of, under color of:

    qui per tutelam aut societatem aut rem mandatam aut fiduciae rationem fraudavit quempiam,

    Cic. Caecin. 3, 7:

    naves triremes per causam exercendorum remigum ad fauces portus prodire jussit,

    under pretext of, Caes. B. C. 3, 24;

    v. causa: per speciem alienae fungendae vicis suas opes firmavit,

    Liv. 1, 41 fin.:

    per simulationem officii,

    Tac. H. 1, 74.—
    D.
    In composition, it usually adds intensity to the signif., thoroughly, perfectly, completely, exceedingly, very much, very (very often in Cicero's epistolary style, and in new-formed words, as perbenevolus, percautus, percupidus, perbelle, perofficiose, pergaudeo; see these articles): pervelle, perfacilis, peramanter; sometimes it denotes the completion of an action, e. g. perorare, peragere;

    sometimes it is repeated: perdifficilis et perobscura quaestio,

    Cic. N. D. 1, 1, 1; so id. Rep. 1, 12, 18; id. Brut. 43, 158; id. Cael. 20 fin.; id. Fam. 9, 20, 3 al.;

    but also: perexiguā et minuta,

    id. Tusc. 2, 13, 30:

    percautus et diligens,

    id. Q. Fr. 1, 1, 6, § 18 al.; cf. Madv. ad Cic. Fin. p. 410.—It frequently occurs in tmesi:

    nobis ista sunt pergrata perque jucunda,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 47, 205:

    per mihi mirum visum est,

    id. ib. 49, 214:

    per enim magni aestimo,

    id. Att. 10, 1, 1:

    ibi te quam primum per videre velim, = videre pervelim,

    id. ib. 15, 4, 2:

    Platoni per fuit familiaris,

    Gell. 2, 18, 1:

    per, inquit, magister optime, exoptatus mihi nunc venis,

    id. 18, 4, 2.—Per quam (also perquam), very, exceedingly, extremely:

    per quam breviter perstrinxi,

    Cic. de Or. 2, 49, 201:

    per quam modica civium merita,

    Plin. Pan. 60:

    per quam velim scire,

    very much indeed, id. Ep. 7, 27, 1:

    PARENTES PER QVAM INFELICISSIMI,

    Inscr. Murat. 953, 2.—As one word:

    illorum mores perquam meditate tenes,

    Plaut. Bacch. 3, 6, 16:

    propulit perquam indignis modis,

    id. Rud. 3, 3, 9:

    erat perquam onerosum,

    Plin. Ep. 2, 11, 13:

    perquam honorificum,

    id. ib. 3, 4, 3.—Separated by an intervening word:

    per pol quam paucos reperias,

    Ter. Hec. 1, 1, 1.—Placed after the word it governs; v. supra, I. fin. and II. B.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > per

  • 100 teneo

    tĕnĕo, tĕnŭi, tentum, 2 ( perf. subj. tetinerim, Pac. ap. Non. 178, 15:

    tetinerit,

    Att. ib. 178, 12:

    tetinisse,

    Pac. ib. 178, 11; fut. perf. tetinero, acc. to Fest. p. 252 Müll. Another collat. form of the perf. tenivi, acc. to Charis. p. 220 P.; Diom. pp. 363 and 369 ib.), v. a. and n. [root ten-, tan-; Gr. tanumai, teinô; Sanscr. tanomi, to stretch, spread; this root appears in many derived meanings; cf. Lat.: tendo, tenuis, tener, tenor, tenus].
    I.
    Act., to hold, keep, have in the hand, in the mouth, etc.
    A.
    Lit.
    1.
    In gen.: Eu. Porrige bracchium, prehende: jam tenes? Cha. Teneo. Eu. Tene, Plaut. Merc. 5, 2, 42; cf.

    argentum,

    id. Pers. 3, 3, 9:

    cum pyxidem teneret in manu,

    Cic. Cael. 26, 63;

    for which: aliquid manu,

    Quint. 10, 7, 31; Ov. M. 11, 560; id. A. A. 1, 320; Hor. Ep. 1, 19, 34:

    aliquid dextrā,

    Ov. F. 1, 99:

    digitis,

    id. ib. 2, 102; id. M. 9, 86; 9, 522:

    lacertis,

    id. ib. 2, 100 al.:

    radicem ore,

    Cic. Div. 2, 68, 141:

    cibum ore,

    Phaedr. 1, 4, 6;

    for which: decoctum diu in ore,

    Plin. 25, 13, 105, § 166:

    aliquem in sinu,

    Ov. H. 3, 114;

    for which: aliquem sinu,

    id. ib. 13, 157:

    flabellulum,

    Ter. Eun. 3, 5, 50:

    facem,

    Verg. A. 6, 224:

    telum,

    Liv. 2, 19. — Prov.: manu tenere aliquid, to seize, grasp, or comprehend a thing which is palpable or evident: aliter leges, aliter philosophi tollunt astutias: leges, quātenus manu tenere possunt;

    philosophi, quātenus ratione et intellegentiā,

    Cic. Off. 3, 17, 68; cf.:

    cum res non conjecturā, sed oculis ac manibus teneretur,

    id. Clu. 7, 20. —
    2.
    In partic.
    a.
    With the accessory idea of possession, to hold, i. e. to be master of, have in one ' s power, possess, etc. (syn.:

    possideo, habeo): multa hereditatibus, multa emptionibus, multa dotibus tenebantur sine injuriā,

    Cic. Off. 2, 23, 81:

    quae tenuit dives Achaemenes,

    Hor. C. 2, 12, 21:

    Evander qui multis ante tempestatibus tenuerat loca,

    Liv. 1, 5:

    provinciam a praedonibus liberam,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 11, 32:

    colles praesidiis,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 43:

    Formiarum moenia et Lirim,

    Hor. C. 3, 17, 8:

    tenente Caesare terras,

    id. ib. 3, 14, 15:

    rem publicam,

    Cic. Mur. 39, 83; id. Sest. 19, 44:

    summam imperii,

    Caes. B. G. 3, 22:

    equitum centurias,

    Cic. Fam. 11, 16, 3:

    alterum cornu,

    to command, Nep. Pelop. 4, 3:

    provincias aliaque omnia,

    Sall. C. 39, 2: scenam, to have sole possession of. [p. 1854] rule over, Suet. Tit. 7. —

    Of the possession of the object of affection: te tenet,

    Tib. 1, 6, 35; 2, 6, 52; Verg. E. 1, 32; Ov. H. 2, 103 Ruhnk.; 15, 88; id. Am. 3, 7, 3; Phaedr. 2, 2, 4.—In colloq. lang., teneo te, I have you once more, of again seeing the beloved person:

    teneone te, Antiphila, maxime animo exoptata meo?

    Ter. Heaut. 2, 4, 27 Ruhnk.; Sen. Ben. 7, 4; Ov. H. 18, 183; cf.:

    et comitem Aenean juxta natumque tenebat Ingrediens,

    Verg. A. 8, 308.—Also like our I have you (fast, bound, etc.):

    teneo te, inquam, nam ista Academiae est propria sententia,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 48, 148; id. Quint. 20, 63.— Absol.: qui tenent (sc. rem publicam), who are in possession of the State, of public affairs:

    qui tenent, qui potiuntur,

    Cic. Att. 7, 12, 3; 2, 18, 1. —
    b.
    With the accessory idea of firmness, persistence, to hold fast, occupy; to watch, guard, defend; to maintain, retain a thing:

    legio locum non tenuit atque in proximum collem se recepit,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 44:

    montes teneri,

    id. B. G. 3, 2:

    haec noctu firmis praesidiis tenebantur,

    id. ib. 7, 69:

    Capitolia celsa tenebat,

    Verg. A. 8, 653:

    quo teneam Protea nodo?

    Hor. Ep. 1, 1, 90:

    te neque intra Claustra tenebo,

    id. C. 3, 11, 44; cf.:

    in manicis et Compedibus saevo te sub custode tenebo,

    id. Ep. 1, 16, 77: laqueis (se) sensit teneri... fugam frustra tentabat;

    at illam Lenta tenet radix exsultantemque coërcet,

    Ov. M. 11, 74 sq.; 1, 535:

    Athenae tuae sempiternam in arce oleam tenere potuerunt,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 1, 2:

    agri qui diu aquam tenent,

    Pall. Apr. 2, 4:

    classem ibi tenebat,

    Liv. 31, 46, 8: secundissimo vento cursum tenere, to hold or keep one ' s course, Cic. N. D. 3, 34, 83; cf.:

    vento intermisso cursum non tenuit,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 8; 4, 28; so,

    cursum,

    Cic. Planc. 21, 52; id. Rep. 1, 2, 3 fin.; Quint. 4, 3, 13:

    quo iter,

    Verg. A. 1, 370; Plin. Ep. 6, 16, 10:

    (lunam) fingunt cursus viam sub sole tenere,

    Lucr. 5, 714:

    tenuit tamen vestigia Bucar,

    Liv. 29, 32, 6.—
    c.
    With the accessory idea of reaching the object aimed at, to reach, attain a place:

    montes effuso cursu Sabini petebant et pauci tenuere,

    Liv. 1, 37, 4:

    regionem,

    id. 30, 25, 11:

    Tenum,

    id. 36, 21, 1:

    terram,

    id. 37, 16, 4; 37, 11, 5; 37, 13, 4;

    26, 29, 4: Hesperiam,

    Ov. F. 1, 498:

    portus,

    id. H. 18, 198; Tac. Agr. 38 fin.:

    cum quibus (navibus) Cythnum insulam tenuit,

    id. H. 2, 9.—
    d.
    With the accessory idea of movement impeded, to hold fast, hold back, hinder, restrain, detain, check, control, stay, etc.:

    naves, quae vento tenebantur,

    Caes. B. G. 4, 22:

    quid hic agatur, scire poteris ex eo, qui litteras attulit, quem diutius tenui, quia, etc.,

    Cic. Att. 11, 3, 1:

    si id te non tenet, advola,

    id. Fam. 16, 19:

    septimum jam diem Corcyrae tenebamur,

    id. ib. 16, 7 init.:

    Marcellum ab gerundis rebus valetudo adversa Nolae tenuit,

    Liv. 24, 20, 7:

    non tenebo te pluribus,

    Cic. Fam. 11, 16, 3; cf. absol.:

    ne diutius teneam,

    id. Verr. 2, 1, 13, § 34: solutum (corpus) tenere, Cels. praef. med.; cf.

    ventrem,

    id. 4, 19 med.:

    tene linguam,

    Ov. F. 2, 602:

    pecus omne tenendum,

    Verg. G. 2, 371:

    vix a te videor posse tenere manus,

    Ov. Am. 1, 4, 10; so,

    manus,

    id. M. 13, 203; cf.:

    manum stomachumque teneto,

    Hor. S. 2, 7, 44:

    saeva tene cum Berecyntio Cornu tympana,

    id. C. 1, 18, 13:

    et Phoebi tenuere viam,

    i. e. impeded, closed up, Luc. 5, 136:

    quo me decet usque teneri?

    Verg. A. 5, 384:

    lacrimas,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 39; so,

    lacrimas in morte miserā non tenebamus,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 67, § 172:

    dictator exercitum in stativis tenebat,

    Liv. 6, 14, 1. —
    (β).
    Esp.: se tenere, to keep back, remain, stay:

    Sabinus castris sese tenebat,

    Caes. B. G. 3, 17; 1, 40; Liv. 2, 45, 2:

    nullā clade acceptā castris se pavidus tenebat,

    id. 3, 26, 3:

    Hasdrubal procul ab hoste intervallo tenebat se,

    id. 23, 26, 2:

    se domi a conventu remotum tenere,

    Nep. Dion, 9, 1:

    ego tamen teneo ab accusando vix me hercule: sed tamen teneo,

    restrain myself, refrain, Cic. Q. Fr. 3, 2, 2:

    nec se tenuit, quin, etc.,

    id. Ac. 2, 4, 12; cf.

    mid.: teneri non potui, quin tibi apertius illud idem his litteris declararem,

    id. Att. 15, 14, 2; Just. 6, 7, 10; cf.:

    se intra silentium tenuit,

    Plin. Ep. 4, 17, 8:

    multum me intra silentium tenui,

    id. ib. 7, 6, 6.—
    B.
    Trop.
    1.
    In gen., to hold, contain in the mind, to conceive, comprehend, know (syn.:

    percipio, intellego): nunc ego teneo, nunc scio, Quid sit hoc negotii,

    Plaut. Capt. 3, 5, 39: tenes Quorsum haec tendant quae loquor, id. Ps. 1, 2, 81:

    tenes, quid dicam?

    Ter. Heaut. 4, 3, 22:

    teneo,

    I understand, id. And. 1, 1, 59:

    teneo quid erret,

    id. 3, 2, 18; Cic. Rep. 1, 23, 37; cf.: quibus capiatur Caesar, tenes, Caecin. ap. Cic. Fam. 6, 7, 5:

    quae a Romanis auguribus ignorantur, a Cilicibus... Lyciis tenentur,

    Cic. Div. 1, 15, 25:

    quoniam ea, quae tenebatis ipsi, etiam ex me audire voluistis,

    id. Rep. 1, 46, 70:

    alicujus reconditos sensus,

    id. Sest. 10, 22:

    quo pacto cuncta tenerem,

    Hor. S. 2, 4, 8:

    et teneo melius ista,

    Mart. 4, 37, 7.—With inf.:

    nullus frugi esse homo potest, nisi qui et bene facere et male tenet,

    Plaut. Bacch. 4, 4, 10; Lucr. 3, 647.—
    2.
    In partic.
    a.
    To have possession of, have the mastery of, to control any thing:

    cum rem publicam opes paucorum non virtutes tenere coeperunt,

    Cic. Rep. 1, 34, 51.—
    b.
    To hold fast, guard, preserve, uphold, keep, insist (syn. servo):

    sin consuetudinem meam, quam in re publicā semper habui, tenuero,

    Cic. Phil. 1, 11, 27:

    ordinem,

    id. ib. 5, 13, 35:

    portum,

    id. Fam. 1, 9, 21:

    statum,

    id. Rep. 1, 28, 44:

    non tenebat ornatum suum civitas,

    id. ib. 1, 27, 43:

    si jus suum populi teneant,

    id. ib. 1, 32, 48:

    nec diutius umquam tenetur idem rei publicae modus,

    id. ib. 1, 44, 68:

    est boni viri, haec duo tenere in amicitiā, etc.,

    id. Lael. 18, 65:

    morem,

    id. Off. 3, 10, 44; so id. Fl. 7, 15; Verg. A. 3, 408:

    foedus,

    Cic. Balb. 15, 34:

    tenebat non modo auctoritatem, sed etiam imperium in suos,

    id. Sen. 11, 37:

    silentium,

    Liv. 1, 28, 8.—
    c.
    To hold fast, maintain, support, defend, uphold, insist:

    illud arcte tenent accurateque defendunt, voluptatem esse summum bonum,

    hold fast, maintain, Cic. Par. 1, 3, 14; cf.:

    illud, quod multos annos tenuisset,

    id. Ac. 2, 22, 71; and:

    quod idem Peripatetici non tenent,

    id. Fin. 3, 13, 44:

    propositum tenere,

    to maintain, Caes. B. C. 3, 42, 1:

    suas leges,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 4, 13:

    causam apud centumviros,

    id. Caecin. 24, 67:

    quo causae teste tenentur,

    Hor. Ep. 1, 16, 43:

    locum quendam cum aliquo,

    Cic. Brut. 21, 81.— With ne:

    plebs tenuit, ne consules in proximum annum crearentur,

    Liv. 4, 30, 16:

    ne quid ferretur ad populum, patres tenuere,

    id. 3, 29, 8; 24, 19, 7. — With ut:

    tenuere patres, ut Fabius consul crearetur,

    Liv. 2, 42, 2 Weissenb. ad loc.:

    scripseram tenuisse Varenum ut sibi evocare testes liceret,

    Plin. Ep. 6, 5, 1.—
    d.
    Of memory:

    alicujus memoriam cum summā benevolentiā tenere,

    to recollect, preserve a recollection of, Cic. Fam. 6, 2, 1.—Esp.:

    memoriā tenere: memoriā tenetis, compluris in Capitolio res de caelo esse percussas,

    you remember, Cic. Cat. 3, 8, 19; id. Fam. 1, 9, 12; Caes. B. G. 1, 14; cf.:

    memoriā teneo, C. Sulpicium Gallum, etc.,

    id. Rep. 1, 14, 21; v. memoria; so without memoria, to bear in mind, remember, recollect:

    satin' haec meministi et tenes?

    Plaut. Pers. 2, 2, 1:

    numeros memini, si verba tenerem,

    Verg. E. 9, 45:

    dicta tenere,

    Hor. A. P. 336; id. S. 2, 4, 8:

    quem (Cyrum) omnia militum tenuisse creditum est nomina,

    Quint. 11, 2, 50; 11, 2, 45.—
    e.
    To reach an object striven after, to gain, acquire, obtain, attain (syn. assequor):

    per cursum rectum regnum tenere,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 17, 44:

    Servium Tullium post hunc captivā natum, ingenio virtute regnum tenuisse,

    Liv. 4, 3, 12:

    teneri res aliter non potest,

    Cic. Fam. 1, 1, 3:

    multa tenuisse,

    Liv. 42, 11, 8:

    causam,

    Ov. M. 13, 190.—
    f.
    To hold, hold back, repress, restrain, bind, fetter, etc. (syn.:

    refreno, retineo): iracundiam teneat, avaritiam coërceat,

    Cic. Par. 5, 1, 33:

    dolorem,

    id. Att. 12, 38, 2:

    cupiditates,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 1, § 3:

    somnum,

    id. Brut. 80, 278:

    risum,

    id. Vatin. 8, 20; Hor. A. P. 5:

    iram,

    Curt. 4, 2, 5:

    ea, quae occurrant, tenere,

    to hold back, keep to themselves, Cic. de Or. 2, 54, 221.—
    g.
    Of laws, etc., to bind, hold, obligate, be binding on, control, etc.:

    quamquam leges eum non tenent,

    Cic. Phil. 11, 5, 11; cf.:

    interdicto non teneri,

    id. Caecin. 14, 41:

    voto quodam et promisso teneri,

    id. Att. 12, 18, 1:

    ut plebi scita omnes Quirites tenerent,

    Liv. 8, 12, 14; cf.:

    olim patricii dicebant se plebi scitis non teneri,

    Gai. Inst. 1, 3:

    cum velut in controverso jure esset, tenerenturne patres plebi scitis, legem tulere, ut quod tributim plebis jussisset, populum teneret,

    Liv. 3, 55, 3:

    teneri alienis foederibus,

    id. 24, 29, 11: poenā teneri, to be subject or liable to, Cic. Q. Fr. 2, 3, 5:

    testibus in re perspicuā teneri,

    to be convicted, id. Caecin. 2, 4; cf.: nemo ita in manifesto peccatu tenebatur, ut, etc., id. Verr. 2, 2, 78, § 191:

    caedis teneri,

    Quint. 5, 14, 11:

    teneri repetundarum,

    Tac. A. 11, 7 fin.:

    furti,

    Dig. 6, 1, 4:

    injuriarum,

    ib. 47, 10, 11:

    mandati,

    ib. 17, 1, 10.— Transf.:

    nisi illi ipsi, qui eas (libidines) frangere deberent, cupiditatis ejusdem tenerentur,

    Cic. Leg. 3, 13, 31 Mos. and Orell. N. cr. —
    h.
    Of dispositions, desires, etc., to possess, occupy, control:

    quae te tanta pravitas mentis tenuerit, ut, etc.,

    has had possession of you, Cic. Vatin. 6, 14:

    summum me eorum (librorum) studium tenet,

    id. Att. 1, 11, 3:

    magna me spes tenet,

    id. Tusc. 1, 41, 97:

    de triumpho nulla me cupiditas umquam tenuit,

    id. Att. 7, 2, 6:

    si consilio pulso libidines iracundiaeve tenerent omnia,

    id. Rep. 1, 38, 60:

    nisi forte quem inhonesta et perniciosa libido tenet,

    Sall. J. 3, 4: neque irā neque gratiā teneri, to be controlled or influenced, Cic. N. D. 1, 17, 45; so,

    teneri desiderio,

    id. Sen. 10, 33:

    studio philosophiae,

    id. Ac. 1, 2, 4:

    magno amore,

    Verg. A. 1, 675:

    pompā, ludis atque ejusmodi spectaculis teneri,

    to be enchained, fascinated, Cic. Fin. 5, 18, 48; cf.:

    ut oculi picturā teneantur, aures cantibus,

    id. Ac. 2, 7, 20:

    is qui audit, ab oratore jam obsessus est ac tenetur,

    id. Or. 62, 210.—With ne, Ov. M. 7, 146. —
    k.
    To take in, comprise, comprehend, include:

    haec magnos formula reges, Excepto sapiente, tenet,

    Hor. S. 2, 3, 46.—More freq. pass.: teneri aliquā re, to be contained, comprised, grounded, to consist in a thing:

    ut homines deorum agnatione et gente teneantur,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 7, 23:

    id quod (genus officiorum) teneatur hominum societate,

    id. Off. 1, 45, 160:

    quae (causae) familiaritate et consuetudine tenentur,

    id. Fam. 13, 29, 1:

    dixi jam antea, ipsam rationem arandi spe magis et jucunditate quadam quam fructu atque emolumento teneri,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 98, § 227.
    II.
    Neutr. (freq. after the Aug. per.; perh. not in Cic.).
    A.
    Lit.
    1.
    To hold a position anywhere, maintain one ' s self:

    quā abscisae rupes erant, statio paucorum armatorum tenebat,

    Liv. 32, 5, 12:

    duo extra ordinem milia tenuere,

    id. 3, 62, 7:

    tenent Danai, quā deficit ignis,

    Verg. A. 2, 505.—
    2.
    For cursum tenere, to hold or take one ' s way, to sail, steer in any direction:

    Aeneam... ab Siciliā classe ad Laurentem agrum tenuisse,

    Liv. 1, 1, 4:

    Cassandream petentes, primo ad Mendin tenuere,

    Liv. 31, 45, 14:

    ad Mendaeum,

    id. 21, 49, 2:

    Diam,

    Ov. M. 3, 690:

    Creten,

    id. ib. 13, 706:

    Hesperiam,

    id. F. 1, 498:

    Ausoniam,

    id. ib. 4, 290 al.:

    medio tutissimus ibis... Inter utrumque tene,

    Ov. M. 2, 140.—
    B.
    Trop., with the accessory idea of continuance (cf. I. A. 2. b. and B. 2. b. supra), to hold out, hold on, last, endure, continue, maintain itself, prevail, etc. (cf. obtineo):

    imber per noctem totam tenuit,

    Liv. 23, 44, 6; cf.:

    incendium per duas noctes ac diem unum tenuit,

    id. 24, 47, 15:

    per aliquot dies ea consultatio tenuit,

    id. 2, 3, 5; 3, 47, 6:

    tenet fama, lupam, etc.,

    id. 1, 4, 6:

    quod nunc quoque tenet nomen,

    id. 1, 17, 6:

    fama tenuit, haud plus fuisse modio,

    id. 23, 12, 2; 21, 46, 10:

    tenuit consuetudo, quae cottidie magis invalescit, ut, etc.,

    Quint. 2, 1, 1 Spald.; so,

    consuetudo, ut, etc.,

    id. 8, 5, 2:

    nomen illud tenet,

    id. 9, 4, 47 Spald.; cf. Ov. M. 1, 712.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > teneo

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • Submarine Command Course — The Submarine Command Course (SMCC), previously known as the Commanding Officers Qualifying Course (COQC), and informally known as the Perisher because of its low success rate, is a training course for naval officers preparing to take command of… …   Wikipedia

  • Command and Staff College — Emblem Motto Pir Sho Biyamooz Saadi Established 1905 Type Constituent college of the National Defence University, Islamabad …   Wikipedia

  • Command guided — Command guidance is a type of missile guidance in which a ground station or aircraft relay signals to a guided missile via radio (or possibly through a wire connecting the missile to the launcher) and tell the missile where to steer in order to… …   Wikipedia

  • Command and Data modes (modem) — Command and Data modes refer to the two modes in which a computer modem may operate. These modes are defined in the Hayes command set, which is the de facto standard for all modems. These modes exist because there is only one channel of… …   Wikipedia

  • Course: Oblivion (Star Trek: Voyager) — Course: Oblivion Star Trek: Voyager episode Duplicates of Torres and Paris are wed Episode no …   Wikipedia

  • Course Setting Bomb Sight — The CSBS Mk. IX mounted in a Fairey Battle. The bomb aimer is sighting through the white ring shaped backsights to the pin shaped foresights (just visible against the armoured cable) and holding the bomb release switch in his right hand. The… …   Wikipedia

  • Command & Conquer: Tiberian series — The Global Defense Initiative s iconic Ion Cannon orbital weapon The Command Conquer: Tiberian series is a sub series of real time strategy video games belonging to the extensive Command Conquer franchise by Westwood Studios and Electronic Arts.… …   Wikipedia

  • Command & Conquer: Red Alert — For the video game sub series, see Command Conquer: Red Alert series. For the iPhone game, see Command Conquer: Red Alert (iPhone). Command Conquer: Red Alert Cover art (Windows 95 version) Developer(s) Westwood Stu …   Wikipedia

  • Command & Conquer (video game) — This article is about the first Command Conquer video game. For the rest of the series, see Command Conquer. Command Conquer Command and Conquer cover art (Windows 95) Developer(s) Westwood Studios …   Wikipedia

  • Command center — War room redirects here. For the film, see The War Room. For the fictional location in the Power Rangers series, see Power Chamber. War Room at Stevns Fortress used in Denmark during the Cold War A command center (often called a war room) is any… …   Wikipedia

  • Command Training School — of the Royal New Zealand Air Force is the unit responsible for training officer cadets. Graduates are then commissioned as Officers on the completion of their Initial Officer Training Course. Formerly located at RNZAF Base Wigram, CTS was… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»